OM47509U

User Manual: 2005 Toyota Prius Owners Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 336

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SECTION

1– 1

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLE
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overvieww . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview . . . . . . . . 5
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel and multi−information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Instrument panel overview
1. Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5. Glove boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6. Power door lock switches . . . . . . . . . 39
7. Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8. Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9. Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

11p003d

10. Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . 96
11. Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12. Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13. Power rear view mirror
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
14. Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1. Headlight and turn signal
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2. Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . 109
3. “POWER” switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4. Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5. Multi−information display or
navigation system including
multi−information display
(For the navigation system,
see the separate “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.) . . . . . . . . 146
6. Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . 106

11p001h

7. Trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8. Km/h or MPH button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9. Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10. Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
11. “P” position switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
12. Electronic shift lever
(R, N, D, B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13. Key slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
14. Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
15. Smart entry and start system
cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
16. Climate remote control
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

17. Instrument panel light control
dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
18. Audio remote control switches . . . . 173

Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview
1. Service reminder indicators
and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . 117, 124
2. Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3. Speedometer
4. Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . 115

11p002i

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and Multi−information display
and

(U.S.A)

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Brake system warning lights∗1
SRS warning light∗1

(Canada)
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle stability control system warning light∗1

Low fuel level indicator light∗1

Discharge warning light∗2
High coolant temperature warning light∗2

Malfunction indicator

lamp∗1
Low engine oil pressure warning light∗2

Master warning light∗1

Hybrid vehicle battery warning light∗2

Open door warning light∗1

Electric power steering system warning light∗2

Automatic head
warning light∗2

light

leveling

system

Automatic air conditioner indicator light

Hybrid system warning light∗2

Recirculate mode indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗3

Windshield air flow indicator light

Shift position indicator light∗4

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers indicator light

Smart entry and start system warning light∗5

Low temperature indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer / Theft deterrent system indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Slip indicator light

Headlight indicator light
Tail light indicator light
Driving ready light

∗1 :

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers— —Instrument cluster” on page 117.

∗2 :

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers— —Multi−information display” on page 124.

∗3 :

If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 142.

∗4 :

For details, see “Hybrid transaxle” on page 136.

∗5 :

For details, see “Smart entry and start system” on page 24.

SECTION

1– 2

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLE
Toyota hybrid system
Toyota hybrid systemm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toyota hybrid system operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For efficient use of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
10
13
13
14

Toyota hybrid system
operating condition

Toyota hybrid system
Toyota hybrid system combines a gasoline engine and electric motor power to
improve the fuel economy and minimize
the emissions as well as to provide
better power performance than the ordinary gasoline−powered vehicles.
Depending on the driving condition, the
vehicle runs on the best combination of;

D Gasoline engine power
D Electric motor power generated by
the gasoline engine

D Electric motor power of the hybrid
vehicle battery
Furthermore, the energy is efficiently used
in the following ways:

D When stopping the vehicle, the gasoline engine is automatically stopped.

D When applying the brakes or decelerat-

ing, electricity is converted from the
turning force of the wheels and stored
in the hybrid vehicle battery. (This is
called regenerative brake.)

Since the battery is charged by the
gasoline engine as needed, it does not
require charging from an outside
source like an electric vehicle.

If you do not use the vehicle for a
long time (2 weeks or more), the hybrid vehicle battery and auxiliary battery
will discharge and their condition is liable to decline. Therefore, in order to
make up for discharging, charge them
once in every 2 weeks for about 30
minutes by starting the hybrid system
with all electrical components turned off.

Basic operations are described below. Besides, Toyota hybrid system performs various controls depending on the operating
condition: The “Energy Monitor” screen
tells you which power is used currently.

12p016c

Electric power
in use
When starting or backing up, etc., the
vehicle runs on electric power from hybrid
vehicle battery, because the gasoline engine efficiency is low.

12p017c

Gasoline power
in use
During normal driving, the vehicle runs
mainly on gasoline power. However, the
electric motor, using electric power generated by the gasoline engine, can supplement the gasoline engine power.

12p018c

Electric and gasoline
power in use
When driving at full throttle, additional
electric power is applied from the hybrid
vehicle battery. Vehicle performance improves.

The vehicle controls the optimum ratio of
the gasoline and electric power to help
use energy more efficiently.

12p019c

Storing electric power

When decreasing speed or applying the
brakes, the turning force of the wheels
makes the electric motor operate as a
generator and additional electricity is
stored in the hybrid vehicle battery (regenerative brake).

12p020c

12p030b

Not in use

When stopping, the gasoline engine automatically shuts off.

Charging hybrid vehicle battery
When the hybrid vehicle battery power is
insufficient, the gasoline engine charges
the hybrid vehicle battery. The system always supplies electricity at a constant level.

Starting your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with push button start system. The hybrid system
will start automatically by pressing the
“POWER” switch briefly with the brake
pedal depressed.
With smart function
1. Carry the key with you.
2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly with
the brake pedal depressed.
Without smart function
1. Insert the key.
2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly with
the brake pedal depressed.
The “READY” light flashes and stays on.
Two beeps sound after a few seconds,
and the hybrid system will start. (If the
ambient temperature is low such as during
winter, it may take time until the “READY”
light comes on.) You cannot start your
vehicle when the brake pedal is not depressed. (For details, see “How to start
the hybrid system—” on page 234.)

For efficient use of your
vehicle
Drive your vehicle with a smooth acceleration and deceleration.

D While driving, energy

is recovered
through the regenerative brake as the
vehicle decelerates. However, for more
efficient use, do not accelerate or decelerate your vehicle more than necessary.

D Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration.

D The remaining capacity of the hybrid

vehicle battery can be confirmed on
the energy monitor screen of the multi−
information display. See “Information”
on page 150 for details. Gradual or
non−abrupt acceleration or deceleration
will more effectively use the benefits of
an electric motor without having to use
gasoline engine power.

When parking, be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in “P”. While driving, use
the hybrid transaxle in “D”.

D In “N”, the gasoline engine operates

but electricity cannot be generated. The
battery will be discharged requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.

D The hybrid system automatically re-

charges the hybrid vehicle battery
when the remaining battery power is
reduced. However, the charging is not
available if the hybrid transaxle is “N”.

The engine may not start even with the
“READY” light on.

Precautions for use
INFORMATION:
The gasoline engine starts and stops
automatically. (It stops during a low
load driving, deceleration or when the
vehicle is stopped.)

The vehicle runs in combination with
the gasoline and electric power. Pay
special attention to the following items.
Be careful of high voltage and high
temperature.

If the “READY” light remains on, you
can start your vehicle using the electric
motor even with the gasoline engine
stopped.

Your vehicle is equipped with the orange
colored cables connected to the hybrid
vehicle battery (about 200 V) and to other
components that are all high voltage.

The gasoline engine may not stop automatically in the following conditions:

CAUTION

z During gasoline engine warm−up
z During hybrid vehicle battery charging
z During low or high hybrid vehicle
battery temperature

Do not touch or come in contact with
orange cables or battery terminals.
Electric shock may cause serious injury or death. Read all caution labels.
An electric motor, coolant radiator and
some other parts reach high temperature
while driving. Caution labels are applied to
these parts. Carefully observe the instructions on these caution labels.

Hybrid vehicle battery
Service
plug
High voltage
cables

12p007d

Air conditioning
compressor

High voltage cables
Inverter unit

Do not touch the service plug.
The service plug is installed in the left
side trim of the luggage compartment. It
is provided to disable high voltage current
from the hybrid vehicle battery when the
vehicle is in need of repairs at your
Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D The shaded parts in the illustration

Never remove or disassemble any
high voltage part, high voltage cables
(orange color) and their connectors.
It may cause death or serious injury.

D Inappropriate handling may cause

are subjected to high voltage.
an electric shock resulting in serious injury or death. Never touch
any item in shaded area.

These high voltage parts or cables
consisting of an electromagnetic
shielding structure produce relatively
the same amount of electromagnetic
waves as conventional gasoline−
fueled vehicles or home electric appliances.

D As the vehicle runs with both the gaso-

When you leave your vehicle, apply the
parking brake to put the hybrid transaxle in “P” and be sure to carry the
key with you and lock all the doors.

D When the hybrid system is started or

As unwanted noise may occur in the
reception of mobile radios, contact
your Toyota dealer for installation or
removal.

If you leave the hybrid system in “ACC”
or “IG−ON”, the hybrid system may not
start because the auxiliary battery will be
discharged.

D If the “READY” light is on, you can

CAUTION

Always keep your hybrid vehicle’s driving characteristics in mind.

CAUTION
The driver should pay full attention
around the vehicle especially when it
is driven only by the electric motor
(with the gasoline engine stopped).
People in the immediate area might
misjudge the hybrid vehicle movement based on the absence of the
regular engine noise.

line engine and electric motor, you may
hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment.

stopped, you may hear a sound coming
from the hybrid vehicle battery in the
luggage compartment. However, this
does not indicate any trouble.
start even though the gasoline engine
may be off.

D When you shift the shift lever to “B”

and release it to its original position
and your foot from the accelerator pedal, engine braking will be applied. However, during high speed driving you
may feel that deceleration by engine
braking is less than that of ordinary
vehicle.

Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in
“P” when parking.
In “N”, the hybrid vehicle battery assembly
is not charged, even if the gasoline engine is operating. You cannot run your
vehicle if the hybrid transaxle is left in “N”
for a long time because the hybrid vehicle
battery assembly will be discharged.

D When you leave your vehicle, be
sure to shut off the hybrid system.

D Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle
in “P” because the vehicle can start
with the “READY” light on and the
engine stopped (no engine sound
and vibration). When the “READY”
light is on, if you leave your vehicle in shift position other than
“P” and “N”, the vehicle will creep
and start abruptly with the accelerator pedal being depressed by mistake. This may cause death or serious injury.

D Do not wet or put foreign objects over

the air vent. Otherwise, the hybrid vehicle battery may be adversely affected
and be damaged.

D You may hear a cooling fan noise from

12p008d

12P009c

the air vent.

For vehicle repairs or maintenance, be
sure to consult your Toyota dealer.
If your vehicle is beyond repair because
of accident or something, be sure to
consult your Toyota dealer.

When the multi−information display
shows this message, the master warning light ( ) comes on in the instrument cluster. Read the message and
follow the instruction.

D When you leave your vehicle, or stop
or park for a while, put the hybrid
transaxle in “P”.

D Charging is necessary. In “N”, charging

will not be applied. The electric generator operates in “P”, “D” or “B”. If you
continue driving, put the hybrid transaxle in “D” or “B” and depress the
accelerator pedal. Do not leave the hybrid transaxle in “N”. When driving in
traffic jam, operate in “D”.

Do not allow anyone to lean against the
side of the rear right seatback, nor put
any luggage or other obstructions on it.

D An air vent is provided on the side of

the rear right seatback to cool the hybrid vehicle battery. If this vent is covered, the hybrid vehicle battery will
overheat resulting in a reduction of the
output performance of the hybrid system.

D The seat belt not properly set in the
guide on the top of the rear seat may
block the air vent. Be sure to pass the
seat belt through the guide properly.

As sealed Nickel−Metal hydride batteries
are used, be sure to consult your Toyota
dealer when disposing of your vehicle.

CAUTION
If you are involved in an accident,
follow these precautions.

D Move the vehicle to a safe place
and perform the followings to reduce the risk of high voltage electricity leakage.
D Depress the brake pedal and apply
the parking brake.
D Press the “P” position switch and
stop the hybrid system.
D If the key is inserted into key slot,
remove it.

D If your vehicle has experienced major damage, you may get an electric
shock. To prevent this, never touch
the high voltage parts (hybrid vehicle battery assembly, etc.) or
cables (orange color) connecting
these parts. If some exposed electric wires are protruding inside or
outside of the vehicle, an electric
shock may also occur. Never touch
them.

D If the fluid leaks or gets in some
part of the vehicle, never touch it
because it may be electrolyte
(strong alkali) from the hybrid vehicle battery. If it gets on your skin
or eyes, wash off immediately with
a large amount of water, if possible,
with boric acid solution, and get
immediate medical attention in order to help avoid serious injury.

D If a vehicle fire occurs, extinguish
it using a fire extinguisher for the
exclusive use on electric fires. As
a small amount of water may be
dangerous, use a large amount of
water, for example from a fire hydrant, or wait for a fire−fighting
team arrival.

D If your vehicle needs to be towed,
do it with the front wheels or all
four wheels raised. If the front
wheels are on the ground when
towing, the electric motor may continue to generate electricity which
could leak electricity. A fire could
occur depending on the degree of
damage. See “If your vehicle needs
to be towed” on page 258.

SECTION

2– 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart entry and start system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
21
24
34
39
41
42
44
45
47

Keys
NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:

21p001a

21P112

z Do not affix any material that cuts
off electromagnetic waves (such as
a metal seal) on the key.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.

1. Master keys with silver ornament (Vehicles equipped with smart entry and
start system)—These keys work in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will need
one of them to make a new key with
a built−in transponder chip. Before you
use these keys, be sure to read “Smart
entry and start system” on page 24.

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

2. Master keys without silver ornament
(Vehicles not equipped with smart entry
and start system)—These keys work in
every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
need one of them to make a new key
with a built−in transponder chip.

Since the doors can be locked without a
key, you should always carry a spare
master key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

3. Mechanical keys (attached to the master key)—These key work for the driver’s door only.

When you use the mechanical key included on the side of the key, slide the
lock knob in the arrow direction and take
out the key as shown. To put the key
back, slide the lock knob in the arrow
direction and replace the key. Be sure to
put the key back when not in use.

z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard or hood
under direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not keep the key together with
the products emitting electromagnetic waves such as a cellular
phone.

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer
system

21p005a

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

21p113

DEACTIVATION
FUNCTION

USING

21p007b

THE

SMART

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
is a shift prevention system. When you
enter the vehicle carrying a smart key
and press the “POWER” switch, the
electronic code in the key is automatically checked to determine whether it
corresponds to the registered ID code
for the vehicle. If the ID code is verified, you can start the hybrid system.

The system is automatically set when the
hybrid system is off and driver’s door is
opened. The indicator light will start flashing to show the system is set.
If any of the following indicator conditions
occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

D The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 45.)

D The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the hybrid system is off and
driver’s door is opened.

D The indicator light flashes inconsistently.

Carrying a smart key and pressing the
“POWER” switch automatically cancels the
system, which enables the hybrid system
to start. The indicator light will go off.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.

21p006a

21p007b

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the hybrid vehicle immobilizer
system. If any unauthorized changes
or modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

DEACTIVATION USING THE KEY
The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
is a theft prevention system. When you
insert the key in the key slot, the transponder chip in the key transmits an
electronic code to the vehicle. The hybrid system will start only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds
to the registered ID code for the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the key slot. The
indicator light will start flashing to show
the system is set.
If any of the following indicator conditions
occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

D The indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 45.)

D The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the
key slot.

D The indicator light flashes inconsistently.

Inserting the registered key in the key slot
automatically cancels the system, which
enables the hybrid system to start. The
indicator light will go off.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the hybrid vehicle immobilizer
system. If any unauthorized changes
or modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI−24KTY
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Smart entry and start system
By carrying a smart key, you can lock
and unlock the doors and start the hybrid system.
For locking the doors, see “Locking the
doors with smart function” on page 29.
For unlocking the doors, see “Unlocking
the door(s) with smart function” on page
30. For starting the hybrid system, see
“Push button start system” on page 130.

21p120

1. Locking and unlocking
2. Starting the hybrid system

If the smart key battery is discharged, the
smart function cannot be used. Use the
mechanical key attached to the smart key
by inserting it in the driver’s door keyhole
to lock or unlock door. To start the hybrid
system, insert the smart key into the key
slot. In order to activate the smart function, the battery should be replaced. For
details, see “—Replacing battery” on page
37.
You can deactivate the smart function by
using the cancel switch. In this case, all
the smart function will be deactivated. For
details, see “Deactivating the smart function” on page 33.

INFORMATION

D Be sure to take the smart key with
you.

D In the following cases, the smart
function or wireless remote control
feature may not operate properly. (If
this happens, use a mechanical key
to lock or unlock the driver’s door
and a smart key to start the hybrid
system.)
z When facilities issuing strong
electromagnetic waves such as
TV towers, electric power stations, broadcasting stations are
nearby.
z When you are carrying a smart
key together with a mobile communications system such as a
two−way radio or cellular phone.
z When the smart key is in contact
with or covered by a metallic object.
z When another person is operating
a wireless remote control function on another vehicle near your
vehicle.

(a) The hybrid system was not turned
off and the transaxle was in a position other than “P”.

D If you do not drive your vehicle,
store the smart key, keeping it at
least 5 m (16 ft.) away from the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened with the
hybrid system in “ACC” or “IG−ON” and
with the transaxle in a position other than
“P”.
Inside alarm: Beeps continuously
Multi−information display: Warning message
Alarms will be turned off by any of the
following operations:
ALARMS AND WARNING LIGHT
Your vehicle is equipped with alarms
inside and outside, as well as warning
light in the instrument cluster, that remind you if there is a problem involving the smart entry and start system.

D
D
D
D

Closing the driver’s door
Pressing the “P” position switch
Turning on the hybrid system
Turning off the hybrid system

This warning light will come on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go off
after a few seconds.
If an alarm sounds or the warning light
comes on, be sure to check your vehicle and smart key.

(d) The smart key was brought outside
the vehicle.

(f) The smart key was brought outside
the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened or
closed with the hybrid system not to be
turned off (and with the transaxle in “P”),
it is determined that the smart key is not
in the vehicle.

When a door other than the driver’s door
is opened or closed with the hybrid system not to be turned off, it is determined
that the smart key is not in the vehicle.

Inside alarm: One beep

Inside alarm: Beeps continuously

Outside alarm: 3 beeps

Outside alarm: Beeps continuously

Warning light: On

(e) Locking with smart function was attempted with the hybrid system not
to be turned off.

(b) The smart key was brought outside
the vehicle with the transaxle in a
position other than “P”.
When the driver’s door is opened or
closed with the hybrid system not to be
turned off and with the transaxle in a
position other than “P”, it is determined
that the smart key is not in the vehicle.

Alarms will be turned off by any of the
following operations:

D Pressing the “P” position switch
D Bringing the smart key inside the vehicle

D Turning off the hybrid system
(c) The hybrid system was not turned
off with the transaxle in “P”.
When the driver’s door is opened with the
hybrid system in “ACC” and with the
transaxle in “P”.
Inside alarm: 3 Beeps
In the “IG−ON” mode, an alarm will not
sound.

When you attempt to lock all the doors
using smart locking function with the hybrid system not to be turned off and with
the transaxle in a position other than “P”.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2
seconds.)
Warning light: On
At this
locked.

time,

the

doors

cannot

Inside alarm: One beep

(g) Preventing the key from
locked inside the vehicle

being

When you close the door with the hybrid
system off but with the smart key left in
the vehicle, and attempt to lock all the
doors using smart locking function, it is
determined that the smart key is in the
vehicle.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2
seconds)

INFORMATION

(i) Outside of effective range
When the “POWER” switch is pressed, it
is determined that the smart key is not in
the vehicle.
Inside alarm: One beep
Warning light: On (for 5 seconds)
(j) Open door warning
When you attempt to lock all the doors
using smart locking function with the hybrid system turned off but with any door
open.

z This function may not operate when
the smart key is left on the instrument panel, luggage cover, floor or
in the glove box.

Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 10
seconds)

z The function may operate if the
smart key is brought outside but it
is very close to the door window or
door handle.

D Closing all the doors
D Pressing the unlock button on the

Alarms will be turned off by either of
the following operations:

smart key

(h) Low smart key battery
When the hybrid system is turned to
“ACC” or “OFF” about 20 minutes after
the hybrid system is turned on or to “IG−
ON”, it is determined that the smart key
battery voltage is low.
Inside alarm: One beep

Warning and its meaning
Inside warning alarm

Outside warning alarm

Warning light

Causes

One beep
(sounds continuously)

—

The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”
or “IG−ON” and when the transaxle was in a position other than “P”.

One beep
(sounds continuously)

The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybrid
system not to be turned off and with the transaxle in a position other
than “P”.

Beeps
(sound intermittently)

—

The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”
and when the transaxle was in “P”.

One beep

3 beeps

The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybrid
system not to be turned off and with the transaxle in “P”.

—

One beep
(sounds for 2 seconds)

The lock switch was pressed with the hybrid system not to be turned
off and with the transaxle in “P”.

One beep

3 beeps

The passenger brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the
hybrid system not to be turned off.

—

One beep
(sounds for 2 seconds)

—

The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but with
the smart key left in the vehicle.

One beep

—

The key battery voltage become about 2 V. (3 V for normal operation)

One beep

—

On
(for 5 seconds)

The “POWER” switch was pressed when the smart key was not in the
effective range of the system.

—

One beep
(sounds for 10 seconds)

—

The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but any
door was opened.

LOCKING THE DOORS
FUNCTION

21p128

Side door

WITH SMART

The smart entry and start system will
lock the doors without being inserted
into the door keyhole.

D The rear doors are not equipped

When you exit the vehicle carrying the
smart key and push the lock button on the
outside front door handle or back door
with all the doors closed, all the doors will
be locked provided that the electronic
code in the key corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle.

push the lock button on the outside
front door handle or back door
slowly and surely. If you push the
button quickly, the doors may not
lock.

At this time, you will hear one beep and
the turn signal lights flash once. However,
when you push the lock button on the
outside front door handle or back door
with any door not closed securely, a beep
sounds for 10 seconds.

NOTICE

21p139

INFORMATION

If the key is in the vehicle, do not
perform door locking operation, or
you might lock your keys inside the
vehicle.

with smart function.

D When locking the doors, be sure to

D When opening or closing a door, do
not touch the lock button on the
outside door handle or back door. If
you push the button, an alarm
sounds 10 seconds.

D When a wireless remote control is
used to lock the doors and a smart
key is left in the effective range of
the smart function in the vehicle,
the doors cannot be unlocked using
the smart function. In this case, use
the wireless remote function to unlock the doors.

D You cannot activate smart unlocking
functions within 3 seconds after the
smart locking function is activated.

Back door

When you push and hold down the back
door opener switch, carrying the smart
key, the ID code is checked in the same
way as in the front door case. And all the
doors will unlock. At this time, two beeps
sound and the turn signal lights flash
twice.

21p136

UNLOCKING
THE
SMART FUNCTION

DOOR(S)

WITH

The smart entry and start system can
be used to unlock the door(s) without
being inserted into the door keyhole.
When you get close to your vehicle (about
1 m (3 ft.) from each outside front door
handle), and are carrying the smart key,
the electronic code emitted from the key
is automatically checked to determine if it
corresponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle. When you take hold of the
side back of the outside door handle surface, it will unlock. At this time, two
beeps sound and the turn signal lights
flash twice.

When you get close to your vehicle (about
1 m or 3 ft. from either front door), carrying the smart key or unlock the back door
using smart key function, the interior light
comes on for 15 seconds if the interior
light switch is in the “DOOR” position.
However, the interior lights go out when
you push the power door lock switch in
the lock position or press the “POWER”
switch once or twice from the off setting
to select the “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode
without depressing the brake pedal. For
further information, see “Interior lights” on
page 107.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
operating the smart unlocking function. If
a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.

INFORMATION

D The rear doors are not equipped
with smart function.

D When unlocking the door(s), be sure
to take hold of the back side of the
outside door handle firmly as
shown in the illustration. Taking
hold of the handle with a gloved
hand might cause a delay in unlocking.

D When you take hold of the handle
or push the back door opener to
unlock the door(s), be sure to confirm that the door(s) have been unlocked. If the two beeps and the
turn signal lights flash twice, the
doors are unlocked. At this time,
you can pull the outside door handle or push the back door opener to
open the door. If you quickly move
closer to the vehicle or pull the outside door handle or push the back
door opener quickly, the doors
might not unlock. If you cannot
open the door by pulling the outside door handle or pushing the
back door at this time, push back
the outside door handle to the original position or release your hand
from the back door and then try
again.

D If you bring the smart key very
close to the outside door handle or
the back door opener, the doors
might not lock.

D If another person who is not carrying a smart key takes hold of
outside door handle or push
back door opener when you
within the effective range of
smart function, the door(s) may
unlock.

an
the
are
the
not

D If a large amount of water is applied to the outside door handle or
the back door during heavy rain or
a car wash, and someone carrying a
smart key is near the vehicle, the
door(s) might be unlocked. However,
if the outside front door handle is
not pulled out or back door opener
not pushed, the doors will lock automatically after about 30 seconds.

D To ensure the unlocking door(s),
perform unlocking operation within
3 seconds after getting close to the
vehicle (about 1 m or 3 ft. from the
front doors or back door). If it
takes longer than that, unlocking
function may not be enabled.

CHANGING THE DOORS TO BE UNLOCKED
Each time you push the lock button
together with the panic button on the
smart key for about 5 seconds with the
hybrid system off, the setting for door
unlocking will change as follows:
1. Driver’s door unlocking mode: If you
perform smart unlocking operation on
the driver’s door, it will unlock. Performing unlocking operation on the
front passenger’s door or back door
will unlock all the doors. When the
system switches to this mode, one
beep sounds inside the vehicle and two
beeps sound three times.
2. All doors unlocking mode: Performing
smart unlocking operation on either
front door or back door will unlock all
the doors. When the system switches
to this mode, one beep sounds inside
the vehicle and two beeps sound twice.
3. Single door unlocking mode: The
driver’s door or back door on which
you perform smart unlocking operation
will unlock. However, performing unlocking operation on the front passenger’s door will unlock all the doors.
When the system switches to this
mode, one beep sounds inside the vehicle and two beeps sound once.

INFORMATION
z When changing the mode, be sure
to push both lock and panic buttons firmly, or panic alarm may be
activated.
z This operation will not change the
wireless remote control unlocking
function.
z In the single or driver’s door unlocking mode, if you get into the
vehicle from the driver’s door carrying the smart key, all the smart unlocking controls activated by the
smart key will be stopped for security. If you get out of the vehicle
from the driver’s door carrying the
smart key and get out of the effective range of the smart function,
unlocking control by the smart key
will be possible. However, unlocking
control may not be carried out for
5 seconds after you get out from
the vehicle. In this case, operate
unlock control again after 5 seconds.

BATTERY POWER SAVING
When doors are locked, the smart entry
and start system transmits electromagnetic
waves to the outside of the vehicle at
regular intervals. For this reason, the vehicle battery will be discharged if the vehicle is left for a long time. If the key is
left within the effective range of the smart
function outside of the vehicle, the key
and the vehicle transmit electromagnetic
waves periodically. If these conditions continue for a long time, the battery in the
key and vehicle will be discharged.
To prevent the batteries from being discharged, the smart function is automatically deactivated in the following conditions:

D If there is no response from the key
for more than 14 days

D If the key is left within the effective
range of the smart function outside of
the vehicle for more than 10 minutes

To reactivate the smart function, perform
any of the following:
(a) Press the lock button on the outside
front door handle or back door while
carrying the smart key.
(b) Perform a wireless remote control operation.
(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key in
the keyhole of the driver’s door.

If you do not intend to drive your vehicle
for a long time, push the cancel switch to
deactivate the smart function.

INFORMATION

D To maintain communication with the
vehicle, smart keys use built−in battery power. The battery service life
is about 1 to 3 years on average. If
battery power becomes insufficient,
replace the battery with a new one.

INFORMATION

21p138a

D The cancel switch is turned on.
D The smart key is inserted into the

D The smart key continually receives
electromagnetic waves, and if it receives strong electromagnetic waves
over a period of time, the battery
can be drastically run down. Therefore, avoid storing smart keys near
any electrical appliances.
Here is a list of electrical appliances which may have adverse
effects on the smart key performance: TVs, personal computers,
cellular phone or cordless phone
recharger units, electric light stands
and fluorescent desk lights
Note that you should always keep
such electrical appliances at least 1
m (3 ft.) away from the smart key.

The smart function will be deactivated
in the following cases:

key slot.

D The battery of the smart key is discharged.
1. Smart function is on.
2. Smart function is off.

DEACTIVATING THE SMART FUNCTION
The cancel switch for this function is
located at the bottom of the instrument
panel on the driver side. When you
push the switch, the smart function will
be deactivated. Pushing the switch
again will reactivate the function.
When the smart function is deactivated,
use a mechanical key or wireless remote
control function key to lock and unlock the
doors. To start the hybrid system, insert
a smart key into the key slot.

Wireless remote control—
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZB31EG
MADE IN JAPAN
FCC ID: MOZB31UG
MADE IN JAPAN
FCC ID: MOZRO−2TY−1
MADE IN JAPAN
FCC ID: PENASAT2
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

21p147

1. Lock switch
2. Indicator light
3. Unlock switch
4. Panic switch
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the side
doors and back door, or activate the
theft deterrent system from a distance
within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the
vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely. At this time, the indicator light flashes once.

—Locking and unlocking
doors
The wireless remote control key is an
electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key.

D The battery may have been consumed.

D Do not leave the key in places where

If you lose your key, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible to avoid the
possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If
you lose your keys” on page 261.)

the temperature becomes high such as
on the dashboard.

D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other

Check the battery in the key. To replace the battery, see “—Replacing battery” on page 37.

21p013f

objects or dropping it.

D Avoid putting it in water.
If your vehicle is equipped with smart
entry and start system, you can use up
to 5 master keys for the same vehicle. In
case of the vehicle not equipped with
smart entry and start system, up to 4
master keys are available. Contact your
Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If the wireless remote control key does
not actuate the doors or alarm or operate
from a normal distance, or indicator light
on the key is dimmed or does not come
on:

Locking operation

21p014f

D Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the key.
Unlocking operation

—Activating panic mode
To lock and unlock all the doors, push
the switches slowly and securely.
To lock: Push the lock switch. All the side
doors and back door are locked simultaneously. At this time, the turn signal lights
will flash once.
Check to see that the doors are securely
locked.
If any of the doors is not securely closed
or if the key is in the key slot, locking
cannot be performed by the lock switch.
At this time, a beep will sound for 10
seconds on the vehicle with smart entry
and smart system. However, if the key is
in the key slot, a beep will not sound. To
stop the beep, close all the side doors
and back door securely or push the unlock switch.
The buzzer can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to
unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing
the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks
all the doors simultaneously. Each time
the unlock switch is pushed, the turn signal lights will flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all
the side doors and back door can be
changed to a single switch operation. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
When the unlock switch is pressed the
interior light comes on. The light remains
on for about 15 seconds unless any of the
doors is opened and then closed. (For
further information, see “Interior lights” on
page 107.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
The timing for the automatic door lock
function can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
If the lock or unlock switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push it again.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer:

D Cancelling the wireless door locking or
unlocking function

D Cancelling the flash of the turn signal
lights

21p015a

Pushing the panic switch for 1 second
blows the horn intermittently and
flashes the headlights, tail lights and
emergency flashers and turns on the
interior light.
The panic switch is used to deter vehicle
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
the alarm midway, do the follows:

D Push any switch on the key.
D Put the hybrid system in the “IG−ON”
mode.

—Replacing battery
The panic mode does not work in “IG−ON”
mode.
The alarm function can be activated or
deactivated. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZB21TG
MADE IN JAPAN
FCC ID: MOZB21RG
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithium
battery or equivalent and a special screwdriver.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken that
small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the battery by following procedures.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.

21p016d

21p017c

z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

1. Remove the mechanical key and cover
with slide the lock knob in the arrow
direction.

2. Remove the 4 screws to take out the
lid of the module.

NOTICE
Do not bend the terminals.
3. Remove the discharged battery and put
in a new battery with positive (+) side
up.

z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the battery and that
dust or oils do not adhere to the
case.
4. Install the lid with the 4 screws.

NOTICE
Take care not to damage or bend the
O−ring when installing.
5. Replace the mechanical key and cover
with slide the lock knob.
After replacing the battery, check that the
key operates properly. If the key still does
not operate properly, contact your Toyota
dealer.

Side doors

21p008a

21p009a

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE DRIVER’S DOOR WITH MECHANICAL KEY

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Insert the mechanical key into the keyhole and turn it.

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Turn the knob forward.
To unlock: Turn the knob backward.
The alarm sounds when you unlock the
door using a key with the theft deterrent
system set. For details, see “Theft deterrent system” on page 45.

21p010a

Driver’s side

To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
The driver’s door can be opened by pulling the inside door handle even if the lock
knob is depressed.
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
The driver’s door cannot be locked if you
leave the key in the key slot.

21p011a

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

CAUTION

Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.

21p012b

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

Back door
CAUTION

12p032

To open the back door, push the back
door opener and raise the back door.
If the back door opener does not operate,
see “If you cannot operate back door
opener” on page 262.

12p033

When closing the back door, the inside
handle can be used to make the reach
easier.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 228 for
precautions to observe when loading luggage.
To close the back door, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the back door,
try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed.

Keep the back door closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage
from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering
the vehicle.
If the auxiliary battery is disconnected
or run down, the back door will be automatically locked and the back door system
may not work after you reconnect, replace
or recharge the auxiliary battery. In any of
these cases, normalize the back door system by following procedure.
1. Unlock the back door with the remote
control key or power door lock switch.
2. Close the back door
hand.

completely by

If the back door system does not operate
properly after the above procedure, there
may be a problem in the system. Contact
your Toyota dealer.

Power windows

21p019a

21p020b

If the auxiliary battery is disconnected
or run down, the power window may not
operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the
auxiliary battery. In any of these cases,
you should normalize the power window.
To normalize the power window:
1. Push down the power window switch
and lower the window halfway.
2. Pull up the switch until the window
closes and hold the switch for a second.

The windows can be operated with the
switch on each door.
The power windows work when the “IG−
ON” mode is enabled.
Key off operation: If both
closed, they work for 45
after the hybrid system is
stop working when either
opened.

front doors are
seconds even
stopped. They
front door is

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window partway, lightly move the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the window and window frame during automatic closing operation or key off closing operation, the window stops and opens halfway.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

Make sure that the window opens and
closes automatically. If the power window
cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.

D The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

Window lock
switch

D Before you close the power win-

21p021b

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’
WINDOWS
Use the switch on each passenger’s
door or the switches on the driver’s
door that control each passengers’ window.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.

21p022c
21p022b

dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure that he or she
operates the windows safely.

D When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

D Turn the hybrid system “OFF” and
take the key with you, when you
leave your vehicle.

Hood
D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the key still inserted
or with the hybrid system other
than
“OFF”.
Otherwise,
he/she
could use the power window
switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in
a serious accident.

21p026b

To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

21p027d

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.

Theft deterrent system
NOTICE

21p032e

3. Hold the hood open by inserting the
support rod into the slot.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. and return the support rod to its
clip—this prevents rattles. Then lower the
hood and make sure it locks into place.
If necessary, press down gently on the
front edge to lock it.

CAUTION

Be sure to return the support rod to
its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod
inserted into the slot could cause the
hood to bend.

21p028a

To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked
or the battery terminal is reconnected
when the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights and tail lights
and other exterior lights.
This function can be deactivated or activated. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.

After inserting the support rod into
the slot, make sure the rod supports
the hood securely from falling down
on to your head or body.

The indicator light will come on when all
the doors and hood are closed and
locked.

21p007b

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.
4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.
Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.

SETTING THE SYSTEM
When the key is inserted into the key
slot:
1. Remove the key.
In case of the smart entry and start
system:
1. Stop the hybrid system and open the
driver’s door
The indicator light will start flashing. (See
“Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on
page 21 for details.)
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET
Activating the system
The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:

D If any of the doors is unlocked or if

the hood is forcibly opened without the
mechanical key, wireless remote control
transmitter or smart function.

D If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.

The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.

If any of the doors are unlocked without
the mechanical key, wireless remote control transmitter or smart function and the
key is not in the key slot, all the doors
will be automatically locked again.
After 1 minute, the alarm will automatically
stop and the indicator light will starts
flashing again.
Reactivating the alarm
Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.
The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
two ways:

D Turn the hybrid system to “IG−ON”.
D Unlock any of the doors with the me-

chanical key, wireless remote control
transmitter or smart function.

If the auxiliary battery becomes discharged due to the vehicle being unused
for a long time, etc., when the battery is
recharged or replaced, the system will
sound the alarm. If this happens, immediately stop the alarm.

Fuel tank cap
CANCELLING THE SYSTEM
The system will be cancelled
above mentioned two ways.

the

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,
the theft deterrent system has been
alarmed. Check to see if there is any
abnormality on your vehicle.

21p117

21p030d

TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The doors should be locked with the
mechanical key, wireless remote control
transmitter or smart function. Be sure
to wait until the indicator light goes off
or starts flashing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever up.
When refueling, turn off the hybrid
system.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing the back
door, also check that the system is
activated when the auxiliary battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected. When testing the hood, release
the lock with the hood lock release
lever and raise the hood.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Do not smoke, cause spark or allow
open flames when refueling. The
fumes are flammable.

D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

21p114

21p115

D Insert the fuel nozzle fully, or fuel
may splash out.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1), and
then turn it a additional 30 degrees
(to point 2). Pause slightly before
removing it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored on
the back side of the fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point
to the left and right, and set it in the
receptacle on the back side of the door.
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

CAUTION

D Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

SECTION

2– 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seatss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold−down rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver and front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52
52
56
57
58
65
72
79

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

D Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

D During driving, do not allow any
passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
severe injuries can occur in the
event of emergency braking or a
collision.

Driver seat

D Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration “NHTSA” advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your diver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:

D Move your seat to the rear as far
as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seat

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.

D Do not lean against the front door
when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D After adjusting the seat position, release the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.

D Do not use seat accessories which

D After adjusting the seatback, push

cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

D Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats equipped
with side airbags. Such change may
prevent the side airbag system from
activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.

D Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Adjusting front seats
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

D While adjusting the seat, do not put

Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.

your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught
and injured.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

CAUTION

22p001d

Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.

—Flattening seatbacks
CAUTION

D Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

22p226

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the
center of the lever and pull it up.
Then slide the seat further forward
than the front−most lock position.

22p227

D After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback forward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace head restraint.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever to unlock and push down the
seatback.
When returning the seatback upright, be
careful not to make yourself hit by the
seatback which will bound with considerable spring force.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

Fold−down rear seat
CAUTION
When only rear left seat is folded
down, rear seat alone can be used.
Never sit on the center seat because
the rear center seat belt cannot be
fastened correctly when the rear left
seat is folded down.

Lower the head restraints to the lowest
position. Push down the lock release
button and fold the seatback down.
Each seatback can be folded separately.
This will enlarge the luggage compartment
as far as the seatbacks. See “Cargo and
luggage” on page 228 for precautions
when loading luggage.

22p203

BEFORE RETURNING REAR SEAT
Make sure the shoulder belt pass
through the guide when returning the
seatback up.
If the shoulder belt on the rear right seat
is off the guide, the air vent for cooling
the hybrid vehicle battery may be blocked
by the belt. If the hybrid vehicle battery
cannot be cooled, the output performance
is limited, reducing the driving performance.

Head restraints
For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving,

CAUTION

To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.

When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:

22p002b

D Make sure seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

Rear center head restraint—When an occupant sits on the rear center seat, always pull up the rear center head restraint to the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

Front

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in the proper
position and are ready to use.

CAUTION

D Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.

D After adjusting the head restraint,

22p101b

make sure it is locked in position.

D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Rear

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 79.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

D Use the belt for only one person at
a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.

D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 79.) To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull
the belt out once more.

D Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or doors.

D Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

D Keep the belts clean and dry. If
they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belt—they may severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page
267.)

D Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

22p007
Tab

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.

up
To
rethe

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from injury.

CAUTION
Take up slack

loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended event. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.

Too high

22p006a

22p005b

D Do not place the shoulder belt un-

Keep as low on hips
as possible
Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

D Both high−positioned lap belts and

der your arm.

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—

possible
then adshoulder
plate.

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.

CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.

22p004a

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
personal injury.

D Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.

D Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

22p205

D If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

D Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

22p008

To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

—Seat belt pretensioners
CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

22p009a

22p011a

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

There are seat belt pretensioners for
both front seats. They are designed to
be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the illustration.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractor so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.

1. Front airbag sensors

The seat belt pretensioners are activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.
The seat belt pretensioner and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

2. SRS warning light
3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
4. Airbag sensor assembly
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.

CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
airbag sensor or surrounding area or
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly,
cause sudden operation of the system
or disable the system, which could
result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−
ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after
about 6 seconds. This means the seat
belt pretensioners are operating properly.
The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, warning light, interconnecting
wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and
warning buzzers” on page 117.)

SRS driver and front
passenger airbags
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.

22p012a

D The light comes on while driving.
D If either front seat belt does not retract

22p013a

or can not be pulled out due to a
malfunction or activation of the relevant
seat belt pretensioner.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The front part of the vehicle (shaded

in the illustration) was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the seat belt pretensioners to
operate.

D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work together with
the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front
passenger’s head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.
The front passenger airbag is activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 58.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 79.

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from
the rear

22p015c
Collision from
the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Hitting a curb, edge
of pavement or
hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

22p016c

22p206

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)
4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
5. Driver’s seat position sensor
6. Airbag sensor assembly
7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and
inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non−
toxic gas to help restrain the froward motion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

D The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

22p020a

22p021b

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

D Toyota strongly recommends that

or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

all infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.
D Do not allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger seat,
since the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, the child may
be killed or seriously injured.
D Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 79.

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

22p022c

D Do not put anything or any part of
your body on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as
they are projected rearward by the
force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components, such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag or airbag sensor
assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating
correctly, cause sudden front airbags activation of the system or
disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the

22p010a

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.

22p023b

D The light comes on while driving.

This indicator comes on when the “IG−
ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after
about 6 seconds. This means the SRS
front airbags are operating properly.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, warning light, interconnecting
wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and
warning buzzers” on page 117.)

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

D The SRS front airbags have been inflated.

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel
or
front passenger airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

22p024b

In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the
SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag on the passenger side are activated
even with no passenger in the front seat
or rear seat.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers in
addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front
passenger and rear outside passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the
chances of death or serious injury
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system,
see “Seat belts” on page 58.

D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her
head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

D Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
79.

22p025a

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.

Collision from the rear

22p026c

22p027a

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
front or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low−speed side
collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
3. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Curtain shield airbag sensors
5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
6. Airbag sensor assembly

In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.

22p028c

22p207

CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear outside passengers must:

D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.

D Do not allow anyone to lean against

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

head closer to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

D Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

22p210

22p029d

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

D Do not attach a cup holder or any

head or hands out of windows
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

22p221

D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

D Do not disassemble or repair the

sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.

front and rear pillars and roof side
rails containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

D Do not use seat accessories which
D Do not attach a microphone or any
other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.

D Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.

D The light does not come on when the

22p010a

z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
z Repairs made on or near the console or front seat

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

This indicator comes on when the “IG−
ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after
about 6 seconds. This means the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags
are operating properly.
The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, warning light, interconnecting
wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and
warning buzzers” on page 117.)

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

D The portion of the doors (shaded in the
illustration) were involved in an accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

22p030f

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

D The surface of the seats with the side

If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 58 for details.

D The portion of the front pillars, rear

CAUTION

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

D For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

D Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation
of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

forward−facing child restraint
system should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable
speed
and
force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

D On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

D Make sure you have complied with
all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.

—Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s instructions which accompany child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following instructions.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

—Types of child restraint
system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

22p031b

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using top strap” on
page 91.

(A) Infant seat

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 93.

22p032b

(B) Convertible seat

—Installation with 3−point
type seat belt

22p033b

22p034b

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

22p018b

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

22p045d

22p037b

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
D Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.

D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

22p038b

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

22p039b

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

22p040b

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

22p041c

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

22p042b

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instruction about the applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

22p043b

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of and accident, the force of the rapid inflation
of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

D On vehicles with side airbags and

22p044a
Move seat
fully back

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

22p036e

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable
speed
and
force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

22p046b

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

22p047b

the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

22p048b

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

22p049b

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

22p050b

4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

D On vehicles with side airbags and

22p051b

22p052a
Move seat
fully back

CAUTION

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

22p053b

is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and across the
child following the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
into the buckle taking care not to twist
the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 58 for details.

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.

—Using a top strap
Anchor brackets

22p050b

2. To remove the booster seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract.

22p055a

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

22p056e

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets on the back of
the rear seatback to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the location of the
anchor brackets.

22p063b

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the luggage cover (see
“Luggage cover” on page 200.) and
raise the head restraint to the uppermost lock position.

22p215

2. Open the cover of the anchor bracket.

22p064d

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 79.

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

22p076e

22p077g

The lower anchorages for the child restraint system interfaced with the
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification
are installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed with these anchorages. In
this case, it is not necessary to fix the
child restraint system with a seat belt on
the vehicle.

Canada only

Type A

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the symbol in the
seatback.
2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.

22p078g

For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 91.)

Canada only

Type B

For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

SECTION

2– 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Outside rear view mirrorss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Tilt steering wheel

Outside rear view mirrors—
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

22p058e

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

22p059a

D After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle,
hold the steering wheel, push down the
lock release lever, tilt the steering
wheel to the desired angle and push
the lever up to lock the steering wheel
in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
When you touch the rear window defogger
switch, the heater panels in the outside
rear view mirrors will quickly clear the
mirror surface. (See “Rear window and
outside rear view mirror defoggers” on
page 110.)

—Power rear view mirror
control
CAUTION

NOTICE

D Do not adjust the mirror while the

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

22p138a

D Since the mirror surfaces can get
hot, keep your hands off them when
the defogger switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.
The mirrors can be adjusted when the
hybrid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION

22p066a

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

22p061

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
To reduce glare from headlights of the
vehicle behind you during night driving,
operate the lever on the lower edge of
the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.

22p213

To turn off the automatic function, push
the “f” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again,
push the “ | ” switch.

22p214

Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.
When the hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”
mode, the inside rear view mirror always
turns on in the automatic function mode.

When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.

CAUTION

To ensure correct functioning of an
anti−glare mirror sensor located on the
back side of the mirror, do not touch
or cover the sensor with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The green indicator illuminates to show
you that the function is on.

Vanity mirrors

22p098b

To use the vanity mirror, swing down
the sun visor and slide the cover.

22p223

To turn on the vanity light, slide the
switch.
The vanity light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Turns the light on when you swing
down the sun visor. However, if the visor
has been slid out, the light may not come
on.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.

100

SECTION

2– 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasherss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key slot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

102
106
107
107
107
108
108
109
109
110
110

101

Headlights and turn signals
(with automatic light control system)
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. Ask your Toyota
dealer for details.

23p124_1

HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

the

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.*
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.

102

The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the driver’s side instrument
panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
Automatic light cut off system
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the hybrid
system off. To turn them on again, press
the “POWER” switch twice from the off
setting to select the “IG−ON” mode without depressing the brake pedal or actuate
the headlight switch. If you are going to
park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.

When the headlight switch is turned to the
first or second clickstop, the brightness of
the instrument cluster will be reduced
slightly unless the instrument panel light
control dial is turned fully on.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not running.

23p109

23p110

Daytime running light system*
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with
the hybrid system started, even with the
light switch in the “OFF” position.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
the position 1.

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−
ON” mode.

To turn off the daytime running light system, twist the knob to the position 2 or
position 3 with the headlights on or turn
the ignition switch off.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

*: Equipped on vehicles sold in Canada

You can flash the high beam headlights
even with the knob turned to “OFF”.

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.

103

Headlights and turn signals
(without automatic light control system)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs—” on page 304.

Automatic light cut off system
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the hybrid
system off. To turn them on again, press
the “POWER” switch twice from the off
setting to select the “IG−ON” mode without depressing the brake pedal or actuate
the headlight switch. If you are going to
park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.

23p001c

HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position 2—Headlights
above

104

and

all

the

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not running.

Daytime running light system*
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with
the hybrid system started, even with the
light switch in the “OFF” position.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
the position 1.

23p003b

23p004b

To turn off the daytime running light system, twist the knob to the position 2 with
the headlights on, or turn the hybrid system off.
*: Equipped on vehicles sold in Canada

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−
ON” mode.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
even with the knob turned to “OFF”.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

105

Emergency flashers
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs—” on page 304.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not running.

23p005a

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

106

Instrument panel light control

23p006d

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial.
When the headlight switch is turned to the
first or second clickstop, the brightness of
the instrument cluster will be reduced
slightly unless the instrument panel light
control dial is turned fully on.

Front fog lights

Interior lights

23p111

To turn on the fog lights, twist the
band of the headlight switch lever to
the position of the fog light. The fog
lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

23p126

Front

The band automatically returns to the
“OFF” position after you release it.

Rear

107

Personal lights

Luggage compartment light

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any
door is opened. The light remains on for
15 seconds when all the doors are closed.

23P012c

23p107

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
With the switch in the “DOOR” position,
the light comes on when any of the doors
is opened or when you get close to the
front door, carrying the smart key. After all
the doors are closed, the light remains on
for about 15 seconds and then fades out.
However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.

D All the doors are closed when the hybrid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

D All the doors are closed and locked.
When all the doors are unlocked, the light
comes on for about 15 seconds and then
fades out, even if the door is not opened.

108

To turn on the personal light, push the
switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.

To turn on the luggage compartment
light, push the switch upwards. To turn
it off, push the switch downwards.
The light is located on the left side of the
luggage compartment.
Even if you push the switch upwards, the
light turns off automatically when you
close the back door.

Key slot light

Windshield wipers and
washer
Twist the interval adjuster upward to
increase the wiping time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

23p125

23p008c

The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.

For easy access to the key slot, the key
slot light comes on while the interior
light is on.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The hybrid system must be in the “IG−
ON” mode.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 304.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

NOTICE

Position 2

Slow

Position 3

Fast

Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.

109

Rear window wiper and
washer

Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
NOTICE
Do not operate the rear wiper if the
rear window is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

23p009c

23p123

To turn on the rear window wiper, twist
the lever knob upward.
The hybrid system must be in the “IG−
ON” mode.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Low speed

Position 2

High speed

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
after you release it.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 304.

110

To defog or defrost the rear window,
push the “CLIMATE” button to display
air conditioner screen and touch the
switch.
Operating the steering switch can also defog or defrost the rear window. (See “Climate remote control” on page 186.)
The hybrid system must be in the “IG−
ON” mode.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
rear window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator will come on to indicate the
defogger is operating.
Touch the switch once again to turn the
defogger off.

The system will automatically shut off after the defogger has operated about 15
minutes.

CAUTION
Since the mirror surface can get hot,
do not touch them when the switch
is on.
Make sure you turn the defogger off when
the window is clear. Leaving the defogger
on for a long time could cause the auxiliary battery to discharge. The defogger is
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

111

112

SECTION

2– 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meterss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Km/h or MPH button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low temperature indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114
115
116
116
117

113

Fuel gauge

24p001b

The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.
Nearly full–Indicator at “F”
Nearly empty–Indicator at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
When you refuel on a slope, the indicator
may not show the correct level.
When you refuel less than about 11.4 L
(3.0 gal., 2.5 lmp.gal.), the fuel indicator
may not change.
After the auxiliary battery is reconnected,
one segment will flash for a while.

114

Depending on the ambient temperature,
the fuel quantity is less than 45 L (11.9
gal., 9.9 lmp. gal.) even at “F”. However,
this does not affect the fuel consumption
and the remaining fuel ratio indicated on
the gauge. (For details, see “Fuel” on
page 204.)
If the fuel gauge display flashes, there
may be a problem in the system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.

Low fuel level indicator light

24p002b
Blink

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level indicator light blinks, fill the fuel
tank as soon as possible.

Odometer and two trip
meters
3. Trip meter reset button—Resets the
two trip meters to zero, and also
change the meter display.

24p109a

At the first blinking of the light, the master
warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on and the message appears on
the multi−information display to remind the
driver to fill fuel.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
indicator light may come on earlier than
usual.

To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the button. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

24p004e

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the button until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

115

Km/h or MPH button

24p005c

You can switch the display between
km/h and MPH by pressing the button.

Low temperature indicator
light

24p107

This light comes on when the outside
temperature is less than +3_C (37_F).
When the “IG−ON” mode is turned on, this
light comes on and goes out after a few
seconds. If the outside temperature is less
than +3_C (37_F) in the “IG−ON” mode,
the light flashes three times and then
stays on.
If the outside temperature is higher than
+3_C (37_F), the light flashes three times
and then goes out.

116

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...
or

Do this.
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(red indicator and buzzer)

(a)
(yellow indicator)

(b)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

(d)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(e)
(f)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

See multi−information display.

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

117

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

Do this.

(g)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(h)

Close all doors.

(i)

Fill up tank.

(j)

Replace engine oil

(k)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(l)

Key reminder buzzer

Remove key.

(m)

P position reminder
buzzer

Push the “P” position switch.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

118

(a) Brake System Warning Lights and
Buzzer

Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

These lights come on in the following
cases when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

D The lights do not come on even if the

RED WARNING LIGHT

D When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled, even after the parking
brake is released.

D When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

D When the regenerative brake system
is fails...
RED OR YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

D When the hydraulic brake system

parking brake is applied
“READY” light is on.

when

the

D The lights do not come on even if the
“POWER” switch is pressed with the
parking brake released.

A red warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at
a safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.

D The red warning light does not turn
off even after the parking brake is
released while the hybrid system is
running.

In either case, this can indicate that
the brakes may not work properly and
your stopping distance will become
longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly
and bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.

D The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
and “VSC” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system and vehicle stability
control system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
In the following case, drive directly to
the nearest Toyota dealer.

D The yellow warning light comes on
while driving.

D The red warning light comes on or
buzzer sounds continuously.

fails...
When the yellow warning light comes on,
it is no problem to continue driving. However, if the red warning light comes on,
it indicates a serious problem and you can
continue driving no longer.

119

Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

D The yellow warning light may stay on
for about 60 seconds after “IG−ON”
mode is enabled. It is normal if it turns
off after a while.

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the red warning light and
buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off
and the buzzer stops sounding after a
few seconds.

D You may hear a small sound in the

engine compartment after the hybrid
system is started or the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly. This is a pump
pulsating sound of the brake system,
and it is not a malfunction.

D You may hear a motor sound in the
engine compartment when the brake
pedal is depressed with the hybrid system off.

D The brake pedal stroke may be short

when you press the “POWER” switch
with the brake pedal depressed.

120

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, the
reminder light flashes and the buzzer
sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,
the light continues flashing and the buzzer
sounds 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt
Reminder Light
This light acts as a reminder to have the
front passenger buckle up the seat belt.
Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits
in the front passenger seat and does not
fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light continues
flashing.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built−in sensors in the seat cushion may
detect the pressure, causing the reminder
light to flash.

(d) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled and goes off after the
hybrid system starts. This means that
the warning light system is operating
properly.
If the lamp remains on or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
following:

D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
This case is a temporary malfunction. The
malfunction indicator lamp will go off after
taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D There is a problem somewhere in the
hybrid system or warning light system
itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.

Emissions inspection and maintenance
(I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator
lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission
control system and OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle
for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 276.
(e) Master Warning Light (

)

If the master warning light comes on, the
warning light for the faulty system is highlighted or the message such as “Please
press “P” to engage Park.” and “The batteries will not be charged if the transaxle
is in Neutral N.” appears on the multi−information display. (See “Service reminder
indicators and warning buzzers— —Multi−
information display” on page 124 or “Precautions for use” on page 14 or “Fuel
gauge” on page 114 for instructions.)

(f) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brake
system and the brake assist system work
properly, the light turns off after the
“READY” light comes on. Thereafter if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
but the brake assist system still operates.
In this case, the wheels could lock up
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the parts monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible so
service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled, or the light
remains on after the “READY” light
comes on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the red brake system
warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact
your Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Either of the following conditions may
occur, but does not indicate the malfunction:

D The light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the hybrid system is
started. It is normal if it turns off after
a while.

121

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if
it turns off after a few seconds.

(h) Open Door Warning Light
This light remains on until all the doors
are completely closed.

(g) SRS Warning Light

(i) Low Fuel Level Indicator Light

This light will come on when the “IG−
ON” mode is enabled. After about 6
seconds, the light will go off. This
means the system of the airbag and
front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This light blinks when the fuel level in the
tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up the
tank as soon as possible.

The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, warning light, interconnecting
wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the parts monitored by the warning light
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
122

At the first blinking of the light, the message appears on the display to remind the
driver to fill fuel.
Contact your Toyota dealer in the following
case:

D All the segments blink.
(j) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled, and will go off after
about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after engine oil replacement, this
light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
then flashes for about 12 seconds when
the hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”
mode. If you continue driving without engine oil replacement, and if the driving
range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the
light will come on after the “IG−ON” mode
is enabled. The light will remain on thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace the oil as soon as possible.
The system must be reset after the engine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:
1. Press the “POWER” switch to the
“OFF” mode with the odometer reading
shown. (For details, see “Odometer and
two trip meters” on page 115.)
2. Press the “POWER” switch twice to
select the “IG−ON” mode while holding
down the trip meter reset button.

Hold down the button for at least 5 seconds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
remain flashing.
(k) “VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system.
The light will come on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled and will go off after the
“READY” light comes on.

CAUTION
If the “VSC” warning light remains on
together with the red brake system
warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact
your Toyota dealer.

1. Apply the parking brake.

In this case, not only the vehicle stability control system will fail but also
the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.

If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied,
there is no problem to continue your driving.

(l) Key Reminder Buzzer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

(m) Shift Position Reminder Buzzer

D The warning light does not come on
after the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

D The warning light remains on after the
“READY” light comes on.

D The warning light comes on while you
are driving.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (except the low fuel level indicator light)

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
the key if you open the driver’s door when
the hybrid system is off and the key is
inserted into the key slot.
This buzzer will sound if the driver’s door
is opened while the hybrid transaxle is in
“N”, “D” or “B”.

2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.

4. Press the “POWER” switch twice without pressing the brake pedal to select
the “IG−ON” mode. At this time, all the
bulbs are checked in self−diagnosis
mode.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light come
on. The yellow brake system, “ABS”
and “VSC” warning lights go off after
a few seconds.
There may be the case that the yellow
brake system, “ABS” and “VSC” warning
lights stay on for about 60 seconds after
the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It is normal
if they go out after a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

123

—Multi−information display

24p006e

If an error occurs in the system, the
warning message and icon appear.
For details on the warning display and
how to remedy the system, see the description on the following pages.

124

If the indicator comes on...

Do this.

(a)

Stop and check.

(b)

Stop and check.

(c)

Stop and check.

(d)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(e)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(f)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

125

(a) Discharge Warning Light
This light warns that the auxiliary battery
is being discharged.
If it comes on while you are driving, there
is a problem somewhere in the charging
system.
The hybrid system will continue to operate, however, until the auxiliary battery is
discharged. Turn off the air conditioning,
blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to
the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

(b) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light

This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.

The light operates to warn that the hybrid
system is almost overheating.

If it stays on while you are driving, pull
off the road to a safe place and stop the
engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

If it comes on while you are driving, stop
the vehicle and check your hybrid system.
For detailed instructions, see “If your vehicle overheats” on page 246.

The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in
the cooling system as this may
cause the hybrid system to overheat. The thermostat is designed to
control the flow of coolant to keep
the temperature of the hybrid system within the specified operating
range.
z Continued driving with the light on
could result in the overheating of
hybrid system.

126

(d) Electric Power
Warning Light

Steering

This light comes on when
steering control system fails.

System

the power

CAUTION
If this light comes on, take your vehicle to the Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. In this case, you may feel
the heavy steering wheel maneuvering. Drive your vehicle while gripping
the steering wheel firmly.

(e) Hybrid System Warning Light (

)

This light comes on if there is a problem
in the electric motor, inverter unit, hybrid
vehicle battery, etc.

(f) Hybrid
Light
This light
cases.

Vehicle
comes

Battery

the

Warning
following

If this light is on, stop your vehicle in a
safe place immediately and contact your
Toyota dealer.

a. The hybrid vehicle battery voltage
drops when the hybrid transaxle is left in
“N” position.

Even if the hybrid system warning light
comes on, you can temporarily increase
the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator pedal. Immediately pull up your
vehicle to a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.

The system works properly if you put the
hybrid transaxle in “P” position and the
light goes off.
b. The hybrid
charged.

vehicle

battery

dis-

If this light comes on with the “READY”
light on in case of b., stop your vehicle
in a safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.
(g) Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the automatic headlight
leveling system.
If it comes on, have your vehicle checked
by your Toyota dealer,

127

128

SECTION

2– 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
“POWER” switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Push button start system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid transaxlee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130
136
140
142
142

129

Push button start system—

—Key slot
CAUTION
Do not put your finger into the key
slot. Your finger might be injured.

25p118

21p006a

NOTICE
Observe the following instructions, or
the key mechanism might be damaged
and will not work properly.
z The key should be operated with a
clean hand and fingers.

The push button start system is used to
start or stop the hybrid system and select
“ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode. (See
“—Selecting the push button start system
mode” on page 132 and “How to start the
hybrid system” on page 234.) The system
contains the following components.
1. “POWER” switch
2. Key slot
3. Brake pedal
4. Electronic shift lever

Your vehicle keys and the key slot are
different shapes from conventional ones.
Keep the following in mind when operating
the key:

z Do not insert the key forcibly.
z Do not insert any key other than
genuine formal keys into the key
slot.

D When inserting the key, be sure to

z Do not pull out the key forcibly
when it cannot be removed.

D When pulling out the key, be careful

z Do not put water, oil, foreign objects, etc. into the key slot.

push it in all the way.

because it will be pushed out by the
spring and it might fly out.

D If the key cannot be pulled out, push
it in all the way again, then pull it out.

z Do not insert a wet, oily or damaged key into the key slot.
z Do not affix a sticker on the key.
z Do not insert the key in the wrong
way.

130

—“POWER” switch
z Do not pull out the key ring when
removing the key out of the key
slot.
Should you find anything unusual,
contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

NOTICE
Observe the following instructions or
the push switch start system may not
work properly.

25p113

z The switch should be operated with
a clean finger. Do not use an oily
or dirty finger.
z Be careful not to spill water or other liquid on the switch.

Press the “POWER” switch slowly and
surely. Quick operation may not activate
the desired mode.

CAUTION

D Do not press the switch while driving, except in an emergency.

D In hot weather, the switch surface
may get hot. Take care not to get
burned.

In the following conditions, contact
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
z If the indicator on the switch
flashes in amber, the system may
be malfunctioning. Once you turn
the power off, it may not turn on
again.
z If you find anything unusual in the
switch function, refrain from using
the vehicle.
In the following condition, have your
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
z The indicator light on the “POWER”
switch does not come on when the
clearance lights are turned on.

131

—Selecting the push button
start system mode
(with smart function—on some
models)

25p105

1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)

3) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

Accessories such as the radio operate.

The hybrid system is off.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly without depressing the brake pedal in the
“OFF” mode turns on this mode.

You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds after
the system is turned off and about 90
seconds have passed.

In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POWER” switch briefly while depressing the
brake pedal will start the hybrid system.
If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”
mode for about an hour, the hybrid system
is automatically turned off.

Without depressing the brake pedal

2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turned
on)
All accessories are operable.

Carrying a smart key allows you to operate the “POWER” switch without the
key being inserted into the key slot.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly without depressing the brake pedal in the
“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

Each time you press the “POWER”
switch briefly without the brake pedal
depressed, the hybrid system mode
changes in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,
“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.

The smart function can be set to become
inoperative using the smart cancel switch.
For details, see “Deactivating the smart
function” on page 33.

132

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is
automatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on page 21.

For starting tips, see “How to start the
hybrid system—” on page 234.

25p106

If in an emergency, you must turn the
hybrid system off while the vehicle is
moving, press the “POWER” switch for
more than 3 seconds. At this time, the
“ACC” mode and shift position “N” are
automatically enabled.
2) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)
The hybrid system is off.

With the brake pedal depressed

The hybrid system will start and stop
by pressing the “POWER” switch briefly
with the brake pedal depressed.
You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed with the hybrid system off.
1) “START” (Amber indicator comes on
for a few seconds.)

You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds after
the system is turned off and about 90
seconds have passed.
The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is
automatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on page 21.

NOTICE
z The hybrid system cannot be
started when the shift position is in
“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” and
then start the system.
z Do not leave the hybrid system in
“ACC” or “IG−ON” for a long time.
The auxiliary battery will discharge.
z The hybrid mode in which the battery is discharged or disconnected
is retained in memory, and that
mode is turned on when power is
applied.
When you leave your vehicle, be sure to
turn the “POWER” switch off and carry the
smart key.
If you get out of your vehicle while carrying a key without turning off the “POWER”
switch and then close the door, a warning
tone sounds inside and beeps sound outside.

The hybrid system is ready to operate
and all accessories are operable. (“IG−
ON”)
Press the “POWER” switch with the brake
pedal depressed.

133

—Selecting the push button
start system mode
(without smart function)
In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POWER” switch briefly while depressing the
brake pedal will start the hybrid system.

INFORMATION
You can insert a genuine key while in
the “IG−ON” mode or with the hybrid
system starting. Do not insert any key
other than genuine keys.

25p103

If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”
mode for about an hour, the hybrid system
is automatically turned off.
2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turned
on)
All accessories are operable.
Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly without depressing the brake pedal in the
“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

Without depressing the brake pedal

Each time you press the “POWER”
switch briefly without the brake pedal
depressed, the hybrid system mode
changes in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,
“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.
1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)
Accessories such as the radio operate.
Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly without depressing the brake pedal in the
“OFF” mode turns on this mode.
The key can be removed at this position.
The hybrid system is automatically turned
off.

134

In the “IG−ON” mode, pressing the
“POWER” switch briefly while depressing
the brake pedal will start the hybrid system. However, if “N” position is selected,
the hybrid system will be turned in the
“OFF” mode.
3) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)
The hybrid system is off. The key can
be removed at this position.
You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds after
the system is turned off and about 90
seconds have passed.
Once you remove the key, the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is automatically
set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on page 21.

For starting tips, see “How to start the
hybrid system—” on page 234.

25p104

If, in an emergency, you must turn the
hybrid system off while the vehicle is
moving, press the “POWER” switch more
than 3 seconds. At this time, the “ACC”
mode and shift position “N” are automatically enabled.
2) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)
The hybrid system is off. The key can
be removed at this position.

With the brake pedal depressed

You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds after
the system is turned off and about 90
seconds have passed.

Once you remove the key, the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is automatically
set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on page 21.

1) “START” (Amber indicator comes on
for a few seconds.)
The hybrid system is ready to operate
and all accessories are operable. (“IG−
ON”)
Insert the key and press the “POWER”
switch briefly with the brake pedal depressed.

135

Hybrid transaxle

“P” position switch

Your hybrid transaxle has an electronic
shift lever system to minimize incorrect
operation. This means you can only shift
to other position from “P” when the brake
pedal is depressed.
With the following improper shifting, the
rejection function operates and a beep
sounds so the hybrid transaxle cannot be
shifted.
(i) When you attempt to shift the transaxle
from the “P” position without depressing the brake pedal.
(ii) When you push the “P” switch while
driving.

25p002i

(iii) When you operate the shift lever from
“D” to “R” or vice versa while the vehicle is moving.

You can operate the shift
lever only in “D”.

(iv) When you operate the shift lever to “B”
from any position other than “D”.

The shift lever always returns to this original position
after shifting operation.
Keep the shift lever in “N”
for a while after you shift it
to that position.

136

In case of (i), the transaxle remains in
“P”. In case of (ii) through (iv), the transaxle is automatically shifted to “N”.
Shift lever

NOTICE
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, the lever may cause a malfunction, resulting in trouble:

25p003a

z Do not remove the knob on the lever.
z Do not use a knob other than the
originally fitted knob.
z Do not hang anything on the lever.

(a) Shift lever
The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Should you find anything unusual,
contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

(b) “P” position switch
The “P” (parking) position is displayed on
the instrument cluster, and the indicator
on the “P” position switch comes on.
(c) Normal driving
1. Start the hybrid system as instructed in
“How to start the hybrid system” on
page 234.
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to “D”.

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting. Doing so can
cause abrupt acceleration.

R: Reverse position (buzzer sounds)
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position
B: Engine braking position
(shown only while in “D”)

3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
When you shift the transaxle to “D”
while backing up, an alarm sounds and
the transaxle is shifted to “N”.

137

CAUTION

25p004c

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, shift the shift lever
to “B” position.
During high speed driving, you may feel
that deceleration by engine braking is less
than that of a typical vehicle.
Do not continue normal driving with the
transaxle in “B” for a long time. This may
cause decreased fuel economy. To prevent
this, use “D” for normal driving.
When you shift the transaxle to “B” from
a position other than “D”, an alarm sounds
and the transaxle is automatically shifted
to “N”.

138

2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the shift lever to the
“R” position. You will hear beeps while
the transaxle is in “R”.
When you shift the transaxle to “R” while
driving, an alarm sounds and the transaxle
is shifted to “N”.

If the driver’s door is opened when the
transaxle is in “N”, “D” or “B”, beep
sounds and a warning message appears
on the multi−information display to warn
you to shift the transaxle to “P”.
If you push the “P” position switch while
driving, an alarm sounds and the transaxle
is automatically shifted to “N”.

NOTICE
Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in
“P” when parking. In “N”, the hybrid
vehicle battery will not be charged
even if the gasoline engine is running. You cannot start your vehicle if
the transaxle is left in “N” for a long
time because the hybrid vehicle battery will discharge.

(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
push the “P” position switch.
If you press the “POWER” switch while
stopping, the transaxle is automatically
shifted to the “P” and the hybrid system
is turned off.

When shifting the transaxle from “P” on
the slope, a large parking lock releasing
noise will be generated. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.

(g) Vehicle driving characteristics
Creeping

The operation is the same as a typical
gasoline powered vehicle.

In order to hold the vehicle properly on an
incline and for better accelerator pedal
operation at starting, your vehicle is designed like a typical automatic transmission vehicle which tends to move without
depressing the accelerator pedal with the
transaxle in a position other than “P” or
“N”.

You may experience the following condition while braking. As they do not indicate
a malfunction, perform braking as usual:

With the transaxle in a position other than
“P” or “N”, depress the brake pedal firmly
even when stopped and apply the parking
brake as required.

Hybrid driving

When moving in a compact area or during
a traffic jam, it is an effective way to
control the speed using only the brake
pedal operation without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Regenerative brake
When the accelerator pedal is released or
the brake pedal is depressed, the electric
motor acts as a generator and converts
kinetic energy to electric energy to provide
deceleration and recover electric energy to
charge the hybrid vehicle battery.
At this time, the electric motor running
noise may increase.

D In

the “OFF” mode, pressing the
“POWER” switch once or twice will select “ACC” or “IG−ON” only if the brake
pedal is not depressed. In this condition, the brake pedal may move a little.

This vehicle runs in combination with the
gasoline engine and electric motor.
If the “READY” light is on, you can start
your vehicle even with the gasoline engine
stopped.

(h) If the system malfunctions
In the following conditions, there is some
problem in the system.

D The indicator on the “P” position switch

flashes. However, this does not indicate a malfunction unless a warning
message appears in the multi−information display.

D All frames of shift position indicators in
the instrument cluster flash.

D The parking system error message appears on the multi−information display.

D The instrument cluster and multi−infor-

mation display does not come on when
the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

In these cases, stop your vehicle in a
safe and level place, apply the parking
brake securely and contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
(i) When the auxiliary battery is disconnected
Before you disconnect the auxiliary battery, confirm the shift position is “P” and
apply the parking brake completely.
After you reconnect the auxiliary battery,
shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm the
shift position is in “N” when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled.

139

Vehicle stability control
system
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti−lock brake system, brake assist system, hybrid system
control, etc. This system automatically
controls the brakes and hybrid system
to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road
surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
This system activates when the vehicle
speed is more than about 15 km/h (9
mph).

CAUTION

D Do not rely exclusively on the vehicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
flashes, sounding an alarm, special
care should be taken while driving.

25p115

D Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use tires other than
specified, or mixed types or size,
the vehicle stability control system
may not function correctly. When
replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 293.)

Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light blinks in the following conditions also.

D The vehicle tires are racing. Utmost
care is required when driving.

D When the anti−lock brake system is

operating. See “Brake system” on page
211 for details.

140

The slip indicator light comes on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go off
after the “READY” light comes on. If the
indicator light does not come on when the
ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota
dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

D The warning light remains on after the
25p117

“READY” light comes on.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system.
The light will come on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled and will go off after the
“READY” light comes on.
If the light comes on while driving, the
system does not work. However, because
the conventional braking still operates, you
can drive your vehicle without damaging
it. Contact your Toyota dealer.

141

Parking brake

Cruise control
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

25p008a

To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal while depressing the brake pedal.
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

Vehicles sold in U.S.A.

CAUTION

D Driving with the parking brake engaged can reduce braking power.

D Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

25p009a

Vehicles sold in Canada

142

The cruise control allows you to cruise
the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades within the limits of hybrid
system performance, although a slight
speed change may occur when driving up
or down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

D To help maintain maximum control
of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow –covered) or
winding roads.

D Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then shift the shift
lever to “B” position to use engine
braking to slow down.

25p006a

25p007a

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED
You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the control lever in the
“CANCEL” direction and releasing it.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

To operate the cruise control, push the
“ON·OFF” switch. This turns the system
on. The indicator light in the instrument
panel shows that you can now set the
vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Another push on the switch will turn the system
completely off.

The transaxle must be in “D” before you
set the cruise control speed.

CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the “ON·OFF” switch
off when not using the cruise control.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed.
If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the
lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down
for a slower speed. Each tap changes the
set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can
now take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will automatically cancel out.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed, the preset
speed will also automatically cancel out.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

143

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction will restore the speed
set prior to cancellation.

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
control lever down in the “– SET” direction.

However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the “ON·OFF” button
to turn the system off and then press it
again to turn it on.

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
control lever down in the “– SET” direction.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

144

SECTION

2– 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Multi−information display
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before using the multi−information displayy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146
147
147
148
150
152
153

145

Reference
Type A (with Navigation system)

1. Multi−information display*
(See page 147 for details.)
2. “DISPLAY” button
The display adjustment screen
shown.
(See page 152 for details.)

3. “INFO” button
The information menu screen is shown.
(See page 150 for details.)

26p045c
Type B (without Navigation system)

4. “CLIMATE” button
The air conditioning operation screen is
shown.
(See page 180 for details.)
5. “AUDIO” button
The audio operation screen is shown.
(See page 156 for details.)
6. “INFO” button (on the steering pad)
The trip information screen is shown.
(See page 151 for details.)
*: In this manual, English version screens
are shown as an example.

146

Before using
the multi−information display

Switch operation
CAUTION

26p049b

Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

This system operates mainly by the
switches on the screen. To protect the
screen, lightly touch switches on the
screen with your finger. When you touch
a switch on the screen or on the bezel,
a beep sounds.

D If the system does not respond to a

touch of a switch, move your finger
away from the screen and then touch
it again.

D You cannot operate dimmed switches.
D Wipe off fingerprints on the surface of
When the “ACC” mode is enabled, the
initial screen appears and the system begins operating.

the display
cloth.

using

glass

cleaning

After a few seconds, the previous mode
display will appear.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the multi−information
display, the display will be automatically
set to the initial mode.

147

Functions
*: For other functions (Maintenance, Telephone and Calender), see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
1. Trip
information,
Screen setting

26p170

With Navigation system*

Language

and

For details, see page 150.

26p026b

2. Adjustment
The contrast and brightness on the screen
are adjusted. For details, see page 152.

26p027c

Without Navigation system

148

26p136a

26p114a

24p006e

3. Air conditioner

4. Audio

5. Warning display

Climate setting operations are available.
For details, see page 180.

The radio and cassette tape operations
are available. For details, see page 156.

The warning symbol for the faulty system
is appeared. For details, see page 124.

149

Information
Type A

—Trip information
Type B

26p009b

Push the “INFO” button to display the
“Information Menu” screen.

26p027c

26p038d

Trip information: The energy monitor and
fuel consumption screen are selected.
Language:
shown.

Select

language

screen

Screen setting: The screen setting screen
is shown.

Energy monitor screen
Touch the “Energy” switch. Vehicle driving
condition, hybrid system operating condition and energy recovery condition are
shown.
1. Indicates the flow of energy by orange
and yellow arrows. While the energy is
recovered, the arrows change the
pointing direction and turn green.
2. Indicates the remaining capacity of the
hybrid vehicle battery.
The screen display updates every 3 seconds, so it may not coincide with the
actual status.

150

4. Indicates the average fuel consumption
after being reset. When the “Reset”
switch is touched or more than 10 L
(2.6 gal., 2.2 Imp.gal.) fuel is supplied,
the average fuel consumption is reset.

26p039c

Fuel consumption screen
Touch the “Consumption” switch. Average
fuel consumption, momentary fuel consumption and recovered energy are
shown.
1. Indicates the past momentary fuel consumption every 5 minutes.

26P180

Steering switch operation
(with Navigation system)
The trip information screen appears directly by pressing the “INFO” button on the
right side of the steering pad. Each press
changes the “Energy Monitor” and “Consumption” screens alternately.

2. Indicates the energy recovered for 5
minutes with symbols. One symbol refers to 50 Wh or the energy by which
a 50 W bulb illuminates for an hour.
Up to 4 symbols will be shown.
3. Indicates the current momentary fuel
consumption.

151

—Language

—Screen setting

Adjustment
Type A

26p115

You can select the language shown on
the screen. Touch your desired switch
on the screen.

26p030c

AUTOMATIC TRANSITION
The function returning to the previous
screen from the audio or air conditioner
screen is selectable. Select “ON” or
“OFF” and then touch “OK”.
ON: The previous screen automatically returns from the audio or air conditioner screen 20 seconds after the end
of audio or air conditioner screen operation.
OFF:The audio or air conditioner screen
remains on.
BACKGROUND COLOR
Select the desired
and touch “OK”.

152

background color

Type B

26p024a

Push the “DISPLAY” button to display
the “Display” screen.

Outside temperature display

26p026b

Contrast and brightness adjustment
CONTRAST “+”:
Strengthens the contrast of the screen.
CONTRAST “–”:
Weakens the contrast of the screen.
BRIGHTNESS “+”: Brightens the screen.
BRIGHTNESS “–”: Darkens the screen.
The screen turns off when you touch the
“SCREEN OFF”. To turn the display
screen back on, push any bezel switch
such as “INFO”, etc. The selected screen
appears.

26P051b

Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to the
day mode or night mode.
To display the screen in the day mode
even with the headlight switch on, touch
“DAY MODE” on the adjustment screen for
brightness and contrast control.

26p046b

The outside temperature is shown ranging from −30_C (−22_F) up to 50_C
(122_F) at the upper right of the energy
consumption or energy monitor screen
or the upper left of the air conditioner
screen.

However, if the km/h or MPH button is on,
mode switching cannot be done. It remains in the day mode. In this case, “DAY
MODE” is not shown on the screen.
If the screen is set in the day mode with
the headlight switch turned to on, this
condition is memorized in the system even
with the hybrid system turned off.

153

154

SECTION

2– 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio systemm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette tape player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact disc player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156
158
163
166
169
173
174

155

Reference
"Type 1
1. Multi−information display screen*
(See page 160 for details.)

With
Navigation
System

2. Ejecting a compact disc
(See page 170 for details.)
3. Compact disc slot
(See page 169 for details.)
4. Frequency tuning
(See page 163 for details.)
5. Scan tuning
(See page 164 for details.)
6. Compact disc mode button
(See page 169 for details.)

26p014c

7. Radio mode button
(See page 163 for details.)
8. Radio mode:
Compact disc
mode:

Seek tuning
(See page 164 for
details.)
Direct access to a
desired program
(See page 172 for
details.)

9. Adjusting the volume
(See page 159 for details.)
10. Turning the system on
(See page 159 for details.)
11. Audio operation screen display button
(See page 160 for details.)
*: In this manual, English version screens
are shown as an example.

156

"Type 2
1. Multi−information display screen*
(See page 160 for details.)

With
Navigation
System

2. Compact disc slot
(See page 169 for details.)
3. Ejecting a compact disc
(See page 170 for details.)
4. Radio mode button
(See page 163 for details.)
5. Frequency tuning
(See page 163 for details.)

26p110a

6. Stopping and ejecting a casette tape
(See page 166 for details.)
7. Scan tuning
(See page 164 for details.)
8. Tape or Compact disc mode button
(See page 166 or 169 for details.)
9. Casette tape slot
(See page 166 for details.)
10. Radio mode:

Seek tuning
(See page 164 for
details.)
Tape or Compact
disc mode:
Direct access to a
desired program
(See page 168 or 172
for details.)

11. Turning the system on
(See page 159 for details.)

157

Using your audio system—
—Some basics
12. Adjusting the volume
(See page 159 for details.)
13. Compact disc load button
(See page 169 for details.)

This section describes some of the basic
features of the Toyota audio system.
Some information may not pertain to your
system.

14. Audio operation screen display button
(See page 160 for details.)

Your audio system works when the hybrid
system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

*: In this manual, English version screens
are shown as an example.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio on
longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is not running.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR” button to turn the audio system on and off. The system turns on in
the last mode used.

158

Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” “DISC”
or “TAPE·DISC” button to turn on that
mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch
from one mode to another.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette
player or compact disc player does not
turn on.

VOLUME CONTROL

Type 1

To adjust the volume, push and turn the
“VOL”.

You can turn off the cassette player by
ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio
system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you
eject the cassette tape. If another function
was previously playing, it will come on
again.

Type 2

159

The switches for radio, cassette tape
and compact disc player operation are
displayed on the liquid crystal display.
Touch them lightly and directly on the
screen.

26p136a

Radio

Compact disc (Type 1)

26p137a

Casette tape

160

26p138a

26p149b

Compact disc (Type 2)

The selected
green.

switch

highlighted

How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, mid−range, and bass levels.
In fact, different kinds of music and vocal
programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range and bass.

26p140a

TONE AND BALANCE
Touching the “SOUND” switch on the
screen displays the sound adjustment
screen.

A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.

BASS “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitched
tones.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

MID “+” or “–” (Type 2 only): Adjusts
mid−pitched tones.
TREB “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitched
tones.
“FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound balance between the front and rear speakers.
“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance between the left and right speakers.
“OK”: The previous screen returns.

161

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

To remove an antenna on the roof, carefully turn it counterclockwise.

When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure to remove it before driving
your Toyota through an automatic car
wash.
YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should be to the right.

NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the player and
do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot, or the tape
player may be damaged.

The discs set in the player are played
continuously, starting with disc number 1.
The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time
from the beginning of the program appear
on the display.
Type 2 only:
When play of one disc ends, the first
track of the following disc starts. When
play of the final disc ends, play of the
first disc starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc number.

NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage the
compact disc player. Insert only one
compact disc into slot at a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

162

Radio operation

26p141a

(a) Listening to the radio
Push these buttons to choose either an
AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display.

Push and turn this knob to step up the
station band or to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST” disappears from
the display.

(b) Presetting a station
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Touch one of the station selector
switches (1−6) and hold it until a
beep is heard. This sets the station
to the switch and the frequency appears on the switch.
Each switch can store FM1, FM2 and AM.
To change the preset station to a different
one, follow the same procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled
when the power source is interrupted by
battery disconnection or a blown fuse.

163

(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of
the following methods.
Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) for
the station you want. The switch (1−6) is
highlighted in green and station frequency
appears on the display.

26p142a

26p126

Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob
briefly. Each time you turn the knob, the
radio will step up or down to another frequency.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK TRACK”
button on either side. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the
stations will be searched out one after
another.

Scan tuning: Push the “SCAN” button or
touch the “SCAN” switch (AM mode only)
briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display.
The radio will find the next station up or
down the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a
station, push the “SCAN” button a second
time.
Preset scan tuning: Push the “SCAN”
button or touch the “SCAN” switch (AM
mode only) and hold it until you hear a
beep. “P. SCAN” appears on the display.
The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay there for
a few seconds, and then move to the next
preset station. To select a station, push
the “SCAN” button a second time.

164

(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
(1) Program type
Each time you touch the “TYPE A” or
“TYPE "” switch, the program type
changes as in the following:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
MISC
ALERT (Emergency message)

(2) Traffic program:
A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.

26p143a

When you touch the “TRAF” switch,
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and
the radio will start seeking any traffic program station.

26p144a

If any traffic program station is not found,
“NOTHING” appears and the previous
mode returns.

When you touch the “TYPE A” or “TYPE
"”, “TYPE SEEK” switch appears. Touch
the switch and the system starts to seek
the station in the relevant program type.

If the traffic program station is found, the
name for traffic program station is displayed and “TRAF” is lit for a while until
traffic announcement is received.

(3) Radio text
If the system receives a radio text from
RDS station, “MSG” appears on the display. Touch the “MSG” switch, and a text
message is displayed on the screen.

165

Cassette tape player operation
(Type 2 only)

26p145b

In case a text message is not accepted
in a screen, you can touch the “MSG”
switch and hold it to display the rest of
the message.
When the system can show the station
name, “RDS” appears on the display.
Each time you touch the “MSG” switch,
indication on the display changes from the
band to the station name, a radio text in
this order. After six seconds passes, indication returns to the band.

26p127

(a) Playing a cassette tape
When you insert a cassette tape, the
exposed tape should face to the right.
The player will automatically start when
you insert a cassette tape. At this time,
“Tape” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette
tape is put in the cassette player, the
player will automatically recognize it and
“MTL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push
the “

166

” button.

26p146a

If a cassette is already in the slot, push
the “TAPE” button.
Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you
are listening to a tape that was recorded
with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction, touch the
“
” switch. The “
” switch will be
highlighted in green. Touch the switch
again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this switch on
or off according to the mode used for
recording the tape.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play the same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette player will play the other side
of the tape using the auto−reverse feature.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
are trademarks of
double−D symbol
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

26p147a

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(b) Manual program selection
Reverse switch: You can reverse the tape
by touching the “ A " ” switch. The display will show the opposite direction after
reversing the tape. Also if the tape reaches the end of one side, it is automatically
reversed to the other side.
Fast forward and Rewind switches: You
can fast forward or fast rewind by touching the “AA” or “""” switch.
To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, touch “""”, to stop the tape while
it is rewinding, touch “AA”.

167

Touch the “SKIP” switch. The player will
automatically skip any blank portions of 15
seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, touch the switch once
again.

26p148a

“SEEK TRACK” button

“RPT” switch: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program.

You can skip forward or skip rewind by
pushing the “SEEK TRACK” button on either side. You like to choose within previous 9 tracks and next 9 tracks being
played. Press the start of track button as
many as you like to skip (3 times if you
like to skip to the third track).

Touch the “RPT” switch while the program
is playing. When the program ends, it will
automatically be rewound and replayed.
Touch the switch again to turn off the
repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between programs for the repeat
feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” switch: The skip feature allows
you to fast forward past long stretches of
blank tape. This is especially useful at the
end of cassettes.

168

When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.
When the beginning of the tape is
reached, the player automatically resumes
normal play.

Compact disc player operation
The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or
“IG−ON”.
(a) Inserting or ejecting compact disc
Type 1:
When you insert a disc, the player will
automatically start. To eject the disc,
push the “

” button.

Type 2:

D Setting a single compact disc:
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
The umber indicators at both ends of the
slot blinking. The umber blinking indicators
changes to continuous green illumination.

D Setting all the discs:
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you
hear a beep.
The umber indicators at both ends of the
slot blinking. The umber blinking indicators
changes to continuous green illumination.

Do not insert one disc stacked on top
of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting stuck in the player.

2. Insert only one disc.
The umber indicators blink.
3. Insert the next disc after the umber
blinking indicators changes to continuous green illumination.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs.

2. Insert only one disc.

To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD”
button.

You can set a disc at the lowest empty
disc number.

Your automatic changer can store up to 6
discs.

After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded.

If you do not insert the discs within 15
seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button,
the operation will be canceled automatically.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot
be played. In this case, “CD CHECK” appears on the display.

NOTICE

If you need to insert the next disc, repeat
the same procedure to insert another disc.

169

26p129a

D Ejecting a single alone:
1. Touch the switch (1−6) to highlight
the disc number you want to eject.
” button for the com2. Push the “
pact disc briefly.
At this time, the umber indicators of the
slot start blinking.

D Ejecting all the discs:
” button for the compact
Push the “
disc until you hear a beep.

170

26p149b

The numbers of the trays where the compact disc is not set are dimmed.

(b) Playing a compact disc (Type 1)
Push the “DISC” button if the disc are
already loaded in the player.
“CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played
continuously. The track number and the
time from the beginning of the program
are shown on the display.

26p149b

(b) Playing a compact disc (Type 2)
Push the “TAPE·DISC” button if the
disc are already loaded in the player.
“CD CHANGER” appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played
continuously, starting with the last disc
you inserted. The disc number of the disc
currently being played, the track number
and the time from the beginning of the
program are shown on the display.
When play of one disc ends, the first
track of the following disc starts. When
play of the final disc ends, play of the
first disc starts again.

26p151b

(d) Searching for a desired disc
(Type 2 only)

Touch the desired disc number.

Touch the “DISC SCAN” switch.

The selected disc number is highlighted in
green.

With “DISC SCAN” highlighted in green ,
the program at the beginning of each disc
will be played for 10 seconds. To continue
listening to the program of your choice,
touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second
time.

The player will start playing the selected
disc from the first track.

After all the tracks are scanned in one
pass, normal play resumes.

The player will skip any empty disc trays.

171

26p130

26p152b

26p153c

(e) Selecting a desired track

(f) Searching for a desired track

(g) Other compact disc player functions

“SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct
access to a desired track.

Touch the “SCAN” switch.

“RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat
of the track you are currently listening to.

Push either side of the “SEEK TRACK”
button. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
Fast forward: Touch the “
” switch and
hold it to fast forward the disc. When you
release the switch, the compact disc player will resume playing from that position.
Reverse: Touch the “
” switch and hold
it to reverse the disc. When you release
the switch, the compact disc player will
resume playing.

172

“Scan” will be highlighted in green. The
compact disc player will play the next
track for 10 seconds, then scan again.
To select a track, touch the “SCAN”
switch a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue
scanning at track 1.
After all the tracks are scanned in one
pass, normal play resumes.

Touch the switch while the track is playing. When the track is finished, the player
will automatically go back to the beginning
of the track and play the track again. To
cancel it, touch the switch once again.
“DISC RPT” switch (Type 2 only): Use
it for automatic repeat of the disc you are
currently listening to.
Touch the switch while the disc is playing.
When the disc is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the disc and play the disc again. To cancel it, touch the button once again.

Audio remote controls
(steering switches)
“RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and
random selection of the disc which you
are currently listening to.
When the switch is touched, the system
selects a track in the disc you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch the
switch once again.
“DISC RAND” switch (Type 2 only): Use
it for automatic track selection for all the
discs and play by the system.
When the switch is touched, the system
selects a track in the discs of all the
trays which are set and plays it. To cancel it, touch the switch once again.
When a track is skipped or the system is
inoperative, touch the switch to reset.
“TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the
disc and track title while the CD−TEXT
disc is playing.
The switch is not displayed on the screen
while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing.
Up to 29 letters can be displayed. To
cancel it, touch the “TITLE OFF” switch.

(h) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with
the player malfunctions, our audio system
will display one of the following error messages.
If “CD CHECK” appears on the display,
it indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged
or it was inserted up side down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly.

26p112

If “CD ERROR” appears on the display,
the following causes are possible.

D There is trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.

D The inside of the player unit may be
too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down.

If the malfunction is not rectified, take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

The switches are installed on the left side
of the steering pad.
“MODE” switch: Use this switch to
change the mode. If a tape or compact
disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD”
mode is skipped. When you push the
switch with the audio system turned off,
the audio system turns on.
“
” switches: Use this switches to adjust the volume. Push “+” to increase the
volume and “–” to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to increase or decrease while the switch is being pressed.

173

Audio system operating hints
(a) When the radio mode is selected
“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch for
seek tuning or to select a station.

D To select a preset station, push the
switch briefly. Do this again to select
the next preset station.

D To seek a station, push and hold the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you
push the switch on either side of the
“Ɲ” or “Ɯ” during the seek mode,
seeking will be canceled.

D To step up or down the frequency,

push and hold the switch even after
you hear a beep. When you release
from the switch, the radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station. Do
this again to find the next station.

(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
“ ” or “ ” switch: Push this switch to
fast forward or rewind the tape or for
automatic program selection.

D Push this switch until you hear a beep

to fast forward or rewind the tape. To
stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push
the same side on the switch until you
hear a beep.

174

D Push this switch briefly for automatic

program selection. When automatically
selecting a program, you can skip up
to 9 programs at a time. For details,
see page 168.

D Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.

D To select a desired disc, push and hold
this switch until the desired number of
the disc appears and you hear a beep.

CAUTION
Operate the switches with due care
while you are driving to avoid accidents.

NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
z Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape into the cassette tape
slot.
z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening
to. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.

Use high−quality cassettes:

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.

D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause

Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.

D Do not use a cassette if it has been

Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

D Store cassettes in their cases and out

Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES

Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:

D A dirty tape head or tape path can
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent
playing
speed,
and
constant auto−reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.
damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.

D Do not leave a cassette in the player
if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.
of direct sunlight.

D Avoid using cassettes with a total play-

ing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS

COMPACT

DISC

D The player is intended for use with
12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

D Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.

175

D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player skip.

D If moisture gets into your compact disc

player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.

CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

D Use only compact discs marked as

Special shaped discs

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

176

NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
Correct

Low quality discs

Wrong

D Handle compact discs carefully, espe-

cially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.

D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

D Remove discs from the compact disc

Labeled discs

player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

177

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.

178

SECTION

2– 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel ventss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

180
186
187
187

179

Controls
1. Outside temperature display

Type A
(with Navigation system)

2. Passenger
display

compartment

temperature

3. Air flow control switch
4. Fan speed control switch
5. Temperature control switch
6. OFF switch
7. Automatic control switch

Type B
(without Navigation system)

27P010g

8. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch (See page 110
for details.)
9. Front windshield switch
10. Air intake control switch
11. Air conditioning operation screen display button
12. Air conditioning on−off switch
In this manual, English version screens
are shown as an example.

180

The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature.
This air conditioning features automatic
fan speed and air flow control which automatically selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow to control the temperature. The hybrid system must be in the
“IG−ON” mode.
CLIMATE: Push this button to display
switches for automatic air conditioning
controls.
27p005a

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the hybrid system is not operating.

Air flow selection
: In the beginning of the automatic air flow mode, air might be delivered.

181

(a) Climate control
SETTING
trol

OPERATION—automatic

con-

27p111a

When one of the manual control buttons
is depressed while operating in automatic
mode, the mode relevant to the depressed
button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically. However, operating the air flow outlets or fan speed will
turn off the automatic control.
Touch the “OFF” switch to turn the air
conditioning off.

27p112a

2. Use the “TEMP” switch to set the
desired temperature.
1. Touch the “AUTO” switch.
The indicator located in the instrument
cluster will come on.
Air conditioning is turned on if not operated.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, and switching of the air intake between RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE
AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
However, if the RECIRCULATED AIR
mode is selected manually, automatic control of air intake cannot be activated.

182

The temperature of air delivered to the
passenger compartment will be controlled
automatically according to the setting.

SETTING OPERATION—manual control
When one of the manual control
switches is touched while operating in
automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the touched switch is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.

If manual air flow selection is desired—

27p113a

27p112a

The outlets from which air is delivered
can be selected manually by touching the
switch. The function of each mode is as
follows:
1. Panel—Air flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

If quick heating or cooling is desired—

from

Touch the “TEMP” switch and hold it until
the maximum figure or minimum figure appears.

the

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
The selected mode is highlighted in green.

183

If manual fan speed control is desired—

If manual switching of air intake is desired—

If recirculated air is used during heating,
the windows will fog up more easily.
If the hybrid system is turned off in the
OUTSIDE AIR mode, the automatic control
of the air intake is activated when the
hybrid system is turned on again.

27p114a

2−way air intake control

27p115a

To improve fuel economy, OUTSIDE AIR
mode control changes when the air intake selector is set in OUTSIDE AIR on
the following conditions:

D When the maximum heating is needed
1. Fan speed at low
2. Fan speed at high

The fan speed can be set to your desired
speed by touching the appropriate air flow
control switch. The higher the fan speed
is, the more air is delivered. Touching the
“OFF” switch turns off the fan.

To remove exterior windshield frost, use the
high speed setting.
The selected mode is highlighted in green.

The air intake control switch is used to
switch the air intake between the OUTSIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIR
mode.
With the switch in the OUTSIDE AIR
mode, the system will take fresh outside
air into the vehicle.
If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, touch the air intake control switch
for RECIRCULATED AIR.
The indicator will come on in the instrument cluster while the RECIRCULATED
AIR mode is selected.

184

with the air flow
Windshield”, fresh
per compartment,
lated in the lower

in “Floor” or “Floor/
air flows in the upwhile air is recircucompartment.

D When cooling is needed, both fresh
and recirculate modes turns on.

(b) Windshield defogging and
defrosting
When the front windshield switch is
touched, the air conditioning is set to operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.

If manual on−off of the air conditioning
is desired—
Touch the “A/C” switch to turn the air
conditioning on and touch it again to turn
the air conditioning off.
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or
exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy.
The air conditioning can be used for year−
round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation.

27p116a

If you touch the front windshield switch
once again while in the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode, the mode then returns to
the last mode used.
The indicator will come on in the instrument cluster while the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode is on.

CAUTION
To remove interior fog on the windshield—
Touch the front windshield switch.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the
windshield—
1. Touch the upper side of the temperature control switch until maximum figure appears on the temperature display.

Do not use the front windshield
switch during cooled air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield
could cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up blocking your
vision.

2. Touch the front windshield switch.
3. Push the “HI” of the air flow control
switch to obtain a maximum air flow.
4. Leave the air conditioning on−off button
off.

185

Climate remote control
(steering switches)

on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

27p126

D Keep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

27p104

D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D The light sensor is located on the driv-

er’s side edge of the instrument panel.
If you put anything on this area or
cover the area, the sensor function
may be adversely affected.

D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

186

D When driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
OUTSIDE AIR and the fan speed selector to any setting except “OFF”.

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

The switches are installed on both sides
of the steering pad.
“A/C AUTO” switch: Use this switch to
turn on the automatic mode. (For details,
see page 182.) Pressing this switch in the
automatic control turns the blower off.
“ TEMP ” switch: Use this switch to
set the desired temperature. (For details,
see page 182.)
“
” switch: Use this switch to change
the air intake mode. (For details, see
page 184.)
“
” switch: Use this switch to remove
interior fog on the windshield. (For details,
see page 185.)

Instrument panel vents

Air conditioning filter—

“
” switch: Use this switch to turn on
or off the rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers. (For details, see
page 110.)

CAUTION

27p006a

82p109

Operate the switches with due care
while you are driving to avoid accidents.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The instrument
panel vents may be opened or closed as
shown.

The air conditioning filter information
label is placed on the left side of the
glove box as shown and indicates that
a filter has been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

187

—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter

82p006b

The air conditioning filter is set behind
the glove box.

188

The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

82p007a

1. Open the glove box, and slide off
the damper as shown.

82p107

2. Push in each side of the glove box
to disconnect the claws.

82p008b

3. Pull the filter case toward you to
take it out.

82p009a

4. Remove the filter from the filter case
and replace it with a new one.

189

5. Install the filter and filter case in the
reverse order of removal.
Set the filter in the filter case correctly.

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

190

SECTION

2– 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outletss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192
192
193
193
194
197
198
198
199
199
200
201

191

Clock

Power outlets
The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.

for

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or
“IG−ON” for the power outlets to be used.

28p009d

The digital clock indicates the time.

28p010a

Instrument panel

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or
“IG−ON”.
To set the hour: Push the “H” button.
To set the minutes: Push the “M” button.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indicator will be reduced.

28p107

Rear console box

192

NOTICE
z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the hybrid system is not operating.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet, or allowing
any liquid to get into the outlet
may cause electrical failure or short
circuits.

Rear console box

Glove boxes
To open the glove boxes, push the each
button.

28p012c

28p002a

The inside of the upper glove box is separated by the partition. In case storing a
longer object, remove the partition.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
lower glove box light will come on when
the lower glove box is open.

CAUTION

To use the rear console box, open as
shown in the illustration.

Upper glove box

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box doors
closed while driving.

CAUTION
When opening the rear console box,
take due care not to catch your fingers.

28p105

Lower glove box

193

Garage door opener
Indicator light

28p108
Buttons
The garage door opener (HomeLinkR
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLinkR and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

(a) Programing the HomeLinkR
The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLinkR button.

To ensure correct programing into the
HomeLinkR, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.

4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLinkR during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons
you want to program.
2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLinkR.
Keep the red indicator light on the
HomeLinkR in view while programming.

194

5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLinkR button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another device.

Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLinkR” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLinkR button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another rolling code system.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program
another device.

Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

Programming other devices

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLinkR.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLinkR button.

the

selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLinkR”.
(b) Operating the HomeLinkR
To operate the HomeLinkR, press the appropriate HomeLinkR button to activate the
programmed device. The HomeLinkR indicator
light
should
come
on.
The
HomeLinkR continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

195

(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLinkR
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLinkR
memory.

CAUTION

D When programming the HomeLinkR
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

D Do not use this

HomeLinkR

Universal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

196

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
Rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.

Auxiliary boxes
To use the box, open the lid as shown
in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

D To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.

28p117

28p003a

D Auxiliary box on the ceiling—
As this box is designed for holding
a light object such as an eyeglass,
do not place any heavy objects in
it. Heavy objects may cause the
holder to open and contents to fly
out resulting in injuries.

Front ceiling

On the instrument panel

NOTICE
Auxiliary box on the ceiling—
In hot weather, inside of the vehicle
ceiling becomes very hot. Do not
leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, the glasses,
etc. inside.

28p011c

Front side of the console box

28p111

Left side of the luggage compartment

197

Cup holders

Bottle holders
The cup holder is designed for holding
cups or drink−cans securely.
To use the cup holder, open the lid.

28p005b

CAUTION

D Do not place anything else other
than cups or drink−cans on the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.

For front seats

D To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop while driving, keep the cup
holder closed when not in use.

D Take due care not to catch your
fingers when
opened.

28p006b

For rear seats

198

the

cup

holder

28p109

The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to use the holder for
any other purpose for which it was
intended. Inappropriately sized or
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during a
sudden braking or an accident.

Tie−down hooks

Luggage storage box

NOTICE
Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the bottle holder because the contents may spill when the door opens
or closes.

22p120

To secure your luggage, use the tie−
down hooks as shown above.
See “—Stowing precautions” on page 228
for precautions when loading luggage.

28p112a

1. To open the luggage storage box, turn
the knob to the “UNLOCK” position and
open the lid.

CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−
down hooks retracted when not in
use.

199

Luggage cover

28p113a

2. Hold the lid open by inserting the support rod into the slot.

28p114

To use the luggage cover, pull it out of
the retractor and hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
keep the luggage storage box closed
and locked while driving.

200

Do not place anything on the luggage
cover. Such items may be thrown
away and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
a collision.

28p115

To remove the luggage cover, lift it up.

Floor mat

28p116a

You can stow the luggage cover in the
luggage storage box in the luggage
compartment as shown in the illustration.
At that time, adjust the cover so that
“TOP” is facing up.
After removing the luggage cover, stow it
in the luggage storage box or place it
somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent passengers
from being injured in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

28p125

To replace the luggage cover, adjust the
cover so that “TOP” is facing upwards.

28p007b

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2
holes, then they are designed for use with
locking clips. Fix the floor mat with locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

201

28p008b

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

202

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut−off systemm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant heat storage system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

204
204
206
206
207
208
208
210
210
211
215
215
216
217
217
218
228
228
231

203

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1000 km (600 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your vehicle must use only unleaded
gasoline.

D Avoid full−throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.

D Avoid racing the hybrid engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).

To help prevent gas station mixups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.
OCTANE RATING
Select unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane
Number 91) or higher.

204

Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower than stated above will
cause persistent heavy knocking. If severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

GASOLINE QUALITY

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.

In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

NOTICE
z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
z If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,
engine knock, etc.), discontinue its
use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

205

Fuel pump shut−off system
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)
The given fuel tank capacity is measured
on EPA/CARB ORVR testing condition
which is approved for nominal capacity
measurement condition.
The fuel tank capacity is decreased at low
ambient temperature. (decreased by about
5 L (1.3 gal., 1.1 lmp.gal.) at −10_C
(14_F).)

The fuel pump shut−off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the hybrid system after the fuel
pump shut−off system activates, press the
“POWER” switch to the “OFF” mode and
start it.

CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the hybrid system. If
you find that liquid has leaked onto
the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and it is in need of repair.
In this case, do not restart the hybrid
system.

206

Operation in foreign
countries
If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

Three−way catalytic converters
NOTICE

30p001d

A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.

The three−way catalytic converters are
emission control devices installed in
the exhaust system.
Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

CAUTION

D Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

D Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn
easily such as grass, leaves, paper
or rags.

z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.

z To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.
z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel system could cause an extremely high temperature.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.

207

Facts about engine oil
consumption

Engine exhaust cautions
CAUTION

D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

D Make sure the exhaust system has
no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.

D Do not run the hybrid system in a
garage or enclosed area except for
the time needed to drive the vehicle
in or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.

D Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the hybrid system running. If it is unavoidable,
however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or
cooling system to force outside air
into the vehicle.

208

D Keep the back door closed while
driving. An open or unsealed back
door may cause exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle.

D To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

D If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, drive with the windows
open and the back door closed.
Have the cause immediately located
and corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a
piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated
when the vehicle is decelerating sucks
some of this oil into the combustion
chamber. This oil as well as some part
of the oil film left on the cylinder wall
is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion
process.

D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.

For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 286.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.

209

Coolant heat storage system

Iridium−tipped spark plugs
CAUTION

Coolant flow control
valve

30p103

D The coolant in this tank is hot even
if the engine and radiator are cold.

D For replacement of the coolant,
contact your Toyota dealer.

D Do

not touch bolts
painted in yellow.

Electric water pump

Coolant heat storage
tank

The coolant heat storage tank system
stores hot coolant and feeds it via the
electric water pump automatically to warm
the engine as required. This system helps
generate clean emissions. To confirm the
coolant heat storage system check, the
pump may operate automatically with the
vehicle stopped (in the “IG−OFF” mode).
Although the pump may operate and
cause noise while the vehicle is stopped,
this does not indicate a malfunction.

pieces)

D In case the bolts are loosened,
there is a risk of hot coolant coming out from inside the tank.

D When this has any malfunction, the
surface of this tank gets hot. To
prevent burning yourself, do not
touch the tank.

INFORMATION

D In such cases as the time of engine
starting and a short trip after the
engine is stopped, the electric water
pump will work for a moment, but
this is no problem.

D This is for the preparation for good
emission.

210

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

NOTICE
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs
and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth drivability.

Brake system
REGENERATIVE BRAKE

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

When the brake is applied, the electric
motor used as a generator converts kinetic energy into electric energy.

This brake system has 3 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,
the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

The regenerative brake works in the following operations.
1. When the accelerator pedal is
leased, the reduced speed equal to
gine braking in a gasoline−fueled
hicle is obtained in accordance with
running mode position of the shift
ver.

reenvethe
le-

2. When the brake pedal is depressed
with the shift lever in “D” or “B”, the
regenerative brake works.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
BRAKE ACTUATOR
The brake actuator uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power−assist the
brakes. If the brake actuator fails during
driving, the brake system warning light
comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.

The yellow brake system warning light
may stay on for about 60 seconds after
the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It is normal
if the light turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the red brake system warning
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding
after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine
compartment after the hybrid system is
started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating
sound of the brake system, and it is not
a malfunction.
In the following conditions, you may hear
a motor sound in the engine compartment.

D The brake pedal is depressed when the
hybrid system is turned off.

D The driver’s door is opened.
D For a few seconds after the hybrid
system is “OFF” and about 90 seconds
have passed.

The brake pedal stroke may be short
when you press the “POWER” switch with
the brake pedal depressed.

211

CAUTION

D Do not pump the brake pedal if the
hybrid system is not operating.
Each push on the pedal uses up
your reserved brake fluid pressure.

D Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to automatically help prevent lock−up of
the wheels during a sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
assists in providing directional stability
and steering performance of the vehicle
under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, the slip indicator in
the instrument cluster flashes and you
will hear a noise. In this situation, to let
the anti−lock brake system work for you,
just hold the brake pedal down more
firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic
stop. This will result in reduced braking
performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

212

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following condition may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction
of the system:

D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and the vibrations of the
vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

30p002b

D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the

Vehicle sold in U.S.A.

joints on the road.

D Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed,
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

30p007b

Vehicle sold in Canada

213

“ABS” warning light
The light comes on when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brake
system works properly, the light turns
off after the “READY” light comes on.
Thereafter, if the system malfunctions,
the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
“IG−ON” mode is enabled,
“READY” light remains on.

the

D The light comes on while you are driving.

214

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

D The light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It is normal if it turns off after
a while.

D Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if
it turns off after a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 117.

Brake pad wear limit
indicators

Electric power steering system
The electric power steering system, using an electric motor, assists the turning of the steering wheel.
In the following cases, you may feel the
steering becomes heavy. However, the
electric power steering system warning
light does not come on. (Because it is
not a malfunction.)

D When maneuvering the steering fre-

quently or keeping the steering wheel
turned fully while the vehicle is stopped
or moving very slowly
The power steering effect will be reduced to prevent the system from overheating. Avoid turning the steering
wheel, or stop the vehicle. When you
leave the vehicle in the “IG−ON” mode
for a while, the system will become
cool.

NOTICE
If you repeat the operation which will
turn on the overheating prevention
function, the electric power steering
system may be damaged.

D When the auxiliary battery is discharged

Check the auxiliary battery’s condition.
If necessary, recharge or replace the
battery. For details, see “Checking auxiliary battery condition” on page 300.

D When the steering wheel is operated

with the hybrid system not to be turned
on (with the “READY” light off)

30p003

The auxiliary battery capacity is decreased temporarily. The system returns to normal some time after the
hybrid system is turned on.
If there is a problem somewhere in the
electric power steering system, the warning light comes on in the multi−information
display. For details, see “Multi−information
display” on page 124.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

215

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
number

—Engine and motor number
Engine number
Motor number

30p004b

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

216

30p005b

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

30p006b

The engine and motor number plates
are installed on the engine and transaxle case as shown.

Theft prevention labels
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

Suspension and chassis
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

217

Tire information—
—Tire symbols (Standard tire)

30p101

218

This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire
size” on page 222.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)” on page 221.
3. Location of tread wear indicators—For details, see “Checking
and replacing tires” on page 293.
4. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−
coated parallel cords. Cords mean
the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
5. Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. A tire not marked
with “M+S” is a summer tire. For
details, see “Types of tires” on
page 231.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. The tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.
7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”
—A tubeless tire does not have a
tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the
tube maintains the air pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 293.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, see “Tires” on
page 315.
10. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

219

—Tire symbols
(Compact spare tire)

30p104a

220

This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A
compact spare tire is identified by
the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall.
This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only. For details,
see “Compact spare tire” on page
248.
2. Tire size—For details, see “Tire
size” on page 222.
3. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)” on page 221.
4. Location of tread wear indicators—For details, see “Checking
and replacing tires” on page 293.
5. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 293.

—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
6. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, see “Tires” on
page 315.
7. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−
coated parallel cords. Cords mean
the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”
—A tubeless tire does not have a
tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the
tube maintains the air pressure.
9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. The tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

21A009a

This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

221

—Tire size

30p102

This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)
222

—Name of each section of tire

21A007a

1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter

21A006a

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer

—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades can
be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A.

Tread wear—The tread wear grade
is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.

223

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

224

—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked at least 3 hours or
more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and shown
on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column
of Table 1 that follows

225

Meaning

Tire related term
Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows

Rim

a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

226

Tire related term

Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side

the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, number Vehicle normal load, number of occu- Occupant distribution in a normally
of occupants
pants
loaded vehicle
2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

227

Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below.
Total load capacity:
379 kg (835 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined
weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the
weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.

228

Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution”
that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
D Put cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment when at all
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
CAUTION
D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
in the luggage compartment.
Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.

—Capacity and distribution
D Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are
much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a collision.
D Do not place anything on the
luggage cover. Such items may
be thrown about and possibly
injure people in the vehicle
during sudden braking or an
accident. Secure all items in a
safe place.
D Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond
the vehicle capacity weight given in Section 9.

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
STEPS FOR DETERMINING CORRECT LOAD LIMIT
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

229

4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

230

Toyota does not recommend towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
riding in your vehicle with the total
load capacity of 379 kg (835 lb.), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
379 kg – 166 kg = 213 kg.
(835 lb. – 366 lb. = 469 lb.)
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:

213 kg – 176 kg = 37 kg.
(469 lb. – 388 lb. = 81 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 228.

CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.

Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.

231

2. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described on page 218.

232

CAUTION
D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
D Do not use tire other than the
manufacturer’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originally equipped
tires and wheels.

SECTION

STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too . . . . . . . . .

234
234
236
237
238
239
239

233

Before starting the hybrid
system
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
head restraint height and steering
wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.

How to start the hybrid
system— (a) Before starting
the hybrid system

(b) Turning on the hybrid
system (Using the smart
function—on some models)

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Depress the brake pedal and hold it
to the floor until driving off.

40p102a

4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
When you get in the vehicle, check
whether the “READY” light is on or
not.

CAUTION
Your vehicle does not produce any
noise or vibration when the vehicle is
ready to be driven with the “READY”
light on. Move your foot carefully
from the brake pedal to the acceleration pedal when driving.

Before starting the hybrid system, be sure
to follow the instructions in “(a) Before
starting the hybrid system”.
Normal starting procedure
Carry the key and press the “POWER”
switch briefly and firmly with the brake
pedal depressed. The “READY” light starts
blinking. After a few seconds, the blinking
“READY” light remains on and two beeps
sound. (If the ambient temperature is low,
such as during winter driving conditions,
it may take time until the “READY” light
is on.)
The engine may not start even with the
“READY” light on.

234

(b) Turning on the hybrid
system (Using the key)
You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed with the hybrid system off.
When the hybrid system is started or
stopped, you may hear a sound coming
from the hybrid vehicle battery in the luggage compartment. However, this does not
indicate any trouble.
If there is a problem somewhere in the
hybrid system, the hybrid system malfunction warning light will come on in place of
the “READY” light. If this happens, contact
your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Never start the hybrid system from
outside the vehicle, or an accident
may occur. Be sure to sit on the driver seat, then start the system when
driving.

NOTICE
z The hybrid
started when
“N”. Be sure
then start the

system cannot be
the shift position is
to put it in “P” and
system.

z If any warning light comes on (See
page 117 for details.) or the auxiliary battery is disconnected, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that
case, push it once again. If the
“READY” light does not come on,
contact your Toyota dealer.
z When you start the hybrid system
at a lowered outside temperature, it
may take longer before the blinking
“READY” light changes to stay on.

40p002c

Before starting the hybrid system, be sure
to follow the instructions in “(a) Before
starting the hybrid system”.
Normal starting procedure
Insert the key and press the “POWER”
switch briefly and firmly with the brake
pedal depressed. The “READY” light starts
blinking. After a few seconds, the blinking
“READY” light remains on and two beeps
sound. (If the ambient temperature is low,
such as during winter driving conditions,
it may take time until the “READY” light
is on.)
The engine may not start even with the
“READY” light on.

235

You may hear a motor sound in the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed with the hybrid system off.
When the hybrid system is started or
stopped, you may hear a sound coming
from the hybrid vehicle battery in the luggage compartment. However, this does not
indicate any trouble.
If there is a problem somewhere in the
hybrid system, the hybrid system malfunction warning light will come on in place of
the “READY” light. If this happens, contact
your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Never start the hybrid system from
outside the vehicle, or an accident
may occur. Be sure to sit on the driver seat, then start the system when
driving.

236

NOTICE
z The hybrid
started when
“N”. Be sure
then start the

system cannot be
the shift position is
to put it in “P” and
system.

Tips for driving in various
conditions
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.

D When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and put the hybrid
transaxle “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.

D Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Winter driving tips
CAUTION

D Before driving off, make sure the
parking brake is fully released and
the parking brake reminder light is
off.

D Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the “READY” light on.

D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

D To drive down a long or steep hill,
reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

D Be careful when accelerating or
braking on a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking,
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.

D Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph)
may result in tire failure, loss of
control and possible injury. Be sure
to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

D Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may
pull to one side when the brakes
are applied. Also, the parking brake
will not hold the vehicle securely.

Make sure you have a proper freeze
protection for engine coolant.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the coolant level” on page
288 for details of coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

237

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the auxiliary
battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any auxiliary battery, so it must be in top
shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Section 8−3 tells you how to
visually inspect the auxiliary battery. Your
Toyota dealer will be pleased to check the
level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 287 for recommended viscosity.
Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about
which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti−
freeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

238

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, push the “P” position
switch and block the rear wheels. Do not
use the parking brake, for snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking
brake mechanism may freeze, making it
hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During extreme
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

40p050b

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground.
This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Trailer towing

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer, too
Improving fuel economy is easy−just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

40p003b

D Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
291 for instructions.

D Do not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

Toyota does not recommend towing a
trailer with your Toyota. It is not designed for trailer towing.

D Accelerate

slowly and
Avoid jackrabbit starts.

smoothly.

D Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes power.

Stop−and−go

driving

D Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

D Do not rest your foot on brake ped-

al. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

D Maintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

D Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance.

239

CAUTION
Never turn off the hybrid system to
coast down hills. Your power steering
and brake booster will not function
without the hybrid system running.
Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the hybrid
system is running.

240

SECTION

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your hybrid system stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheatss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot operate back door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242
246
246
247
258
261
262

241

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting
procedure given in “How to start the
hybrid system” on page 234 and that you
have sufficient fuel. Also check whether
the other keys will start the hybrid
system. If they work, your key may be
broken. Have the key checked at your
Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work,
there may be a malfunction in the hybrid
vehicle immobilizer system. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page 20.)
If the instrument cluster dims or the
instrument cluster display turns off
with the hybrid system on—
1. Check that the auxiliary battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the auxiliary battery terminals are
O.K., the auxiliary battery is discharged. You may try jump starting.
See “(b) Jump starting” for further instructions.

NOTICE
Hybrid vehicles
started.

242

cannot

push−

(b) Jump starting
If the instrument cluster is shown in
appropriate brightness with the hybrid
system is in the “IG−ON” mode—
The hybrid vehicle system is suspected to
be faulty. Contact your Toyota dealer.

If the auxiliary battery is discharged,
the hybrid system can be started by
jump starting. Depending on the vehicle
condition, the engine may not start.
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If the auxiliary battery is discharged, you
cannot access to the auxiliary battery in
the luggage compartment because the
back door cannot be opened. Use the exclusive jump starting terminal in the engine compartment. For details, see “JUMP
STARTING PROCEDURE” on page 243.

NOTICE
If the auxiliary battery is discharged
with the transaxle in “P”, your vehicle
cannot be moved unless the front
wheels are raised. This is because the
front wheels are locked by means of
the parking lock mechanism.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent qualified
technician or towing service.

CAUTION

NOTICE

D Booster battery contains sulfuric

z The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless
you are sure that the booster battery is correct.

acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses
when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or
vehicle.

D If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

D The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

z After jump starting procedure,
hybrid system may not start
pushing the “POWER” switch.
that case, push it once again. If
“READY” light does not come
contact your Toyota dealer.

the
by
In
the
on,

50p049

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Apply the parking brake and turn off
the headlight switch and interior light.
2. Turn off the hybrid system and remove
the key if inserted.
3. Open the hood and fuse block cover
shown in the above illustration.

243

Exclusive jump starting
terminal cover

7. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

Exclusive jump
starting terminal

50p044c Positive
terminal

(“+” mark)

Jumper
cable

Booster
battery

4. Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.

8. Connect the jumper cables in the order
a, b, c, d.

5. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all
unnecessary lights and accessories.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the exclusive
jump starting terminal.

When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with. If jump starting is difficult, charge
the battery for several minutes.
6. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster batteries. Lay a cloth
over the open vents on the batteries.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

244

b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.

Jumper
cable

50p080a

50p045c
Negative
terminal
(“–” mark)

10. Start the hybrid system. Make sure the
“READY” light is on. If the hybrid vehicle battery warning light comes on in
the multi−information display, the hybrid
vehicle battery is also discharged. Contact your Toyota dealer.
11. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
12. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.

Booster
battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative
(–) terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable
to a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic point of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
The recommended connecting point is
shown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.
9. Charge the discharged battery with the
jumper cables connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the
engine in the vehicle with the booster
battery at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

13. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your auxiliary battery discharging is not apparent (for example,
lights left on), you should have it checked
at your Toyota dealer.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your hybrid
system in the normal way.
If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it
checked at your Toyota dealer.

245

If your hybrid system stalls
while driving
If your hybrid system stalls while driving...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try starting the hybrid system again.
If the hybrid system will not start, see “If
your vehicle will not start” on page 242.

CAUTION
If the hybrid system is not operating,
the power assist for the brakes and
steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.

If your vehicle overheats
If your high coolant temperature warning light comes on, if you experience a
loss of power, or if you hear a loud
knocking or pinging noise, the hybrid
system has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Push the “P” position switch
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.

CAUTION

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the hybrid
system. Wait until the steam subsides
before opening the hood. If there is no
coolant boiling over or steam, leave the
hybrid system running and make sure
the electric cooling fan is operating. If
it is not, turn the hybrid system off.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

246

When the hybrid system is running,
keep hands and clothing away from
the moving fan and engine drive
belts.
4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the hybrid system immediately. Call a Toyota
dealer for assistance.
5. If there are no obvious leaks, check
the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add
coolant to the reservoir while the hybrid system is running. Fill it about half
full.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the hybrid system and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and
steam blown out under pressure.

If you have a flat tire—
6. After the coolant temperature has
cooled to normal, again check the coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary,
bring it up to half full again. Serious
coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the hybrid system and turn
on your emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your
body under a vehicle supported by a jack. Personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the hybrid
system while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle at a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.

247

D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
D Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
D Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

248

NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.

50p007a

Compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is designed
for temporary emergency use only.
The compact spare tire is identified
by the distinctive wording “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into the
side wall of the tire.
The compact spare tire saves space
in your luggage compartment, and its
lighter weight helps to improve fuel
economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be used
many times, if necessary. It has tread
life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) depending on road conditions and your
driving habits. When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the
tire.
See also the tire information on page
293 for details on the tread wear indicators and other service information.

CAUTION
D The compact spare tire was designed especially for your Toyota. Do not use it on any other
vehicle.
D Do not use more than one compact spare tire at the same
time.
D Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph) when driving with the
compact spare tire.
D Replace the compact spare tire
with the standard tire as soon
as possible.
D Avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration and sharp
turns with the compact spare
tire.

NOTICE
Your ground clearance is reduced when the compact spare
tire is installed so avoid driving
over obstacles and drive slowly
on rough, unpaved roads and
speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle
may get caught, resulting in
damage.

249

—Required tools and spare
tire

50p008c

1. Get the required tools and spare
tire.
1 Wheel nut wrench
2 Jack handle
3 Jack
4 Spare tire
To open the luggage storage box, see
“Luggage storage box” on page 199.
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.

250

50p009a

To remove the jack, unlock the tightening strap.
To store the jack, make sure it is securely held by the tightening strap.

50p010e

To remove the spare tire:
1. Remove the luggage storage box.
2. Loosen the bolt and remove it.
3. Remove the jack box.
Then take the spare tire out of the
vehicle.
When storing the spare tire, put it in
place with the inner side of the wheel
facing up. Then secure the tire by repeating the above removal steps in
reverse order to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden
braking.

—Blocking the wheel

—Loosening wheel nuts

When installing the jack box, align the
arrows on the jack box with the ones
on the body.

50p011b

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When chocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.

50p013d

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen them. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so
that the handle is on the right side,
as shown above. Grab the wrench
near the end of the handle and pull
up on the handle. Be careful that the
wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.

251

—Positioning the jack

—Raising your vehicle

CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.

50p014e

4. Position the jack at the jack
points as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.

252

50p015c

5. After making sure no one is in
the vehicle, raise it high enough
so that the spare tire can be
installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly positioned.

—Changing wheels
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

50p016a

6. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

50p017c

Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while
driving.

253

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

—Lowering your vehicle
CAUTION

50p018c

7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire and see if you can tighten them
more.

254

Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loosen and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

50p019c

8. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to
tighten the nuts. Do not use other
tools or any additional leverage other
than your hands, such as a hammer,
pipe or your foot. Make sure the
wrench is securely engaged over the
nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.

—Stowing flat tire
CAUTION
D When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
D Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.

9. Restow all the tools and jack securely. Then secure the flat tire
in the luggage compartment
with the tire tie−down belts and
tie−down hooks as follows
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools and jack are securely in
place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or
sudden braking.

1. Before stowing the flat tire, remove
the center wheel ornament by
pushing from the reverse side.
Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

255

2. Put the flat tire on the center of
the luggage storage box lid with
the outer side of the wheel facing
up. Hook one ends of the belts to
the front tie−down hooks.

256

3. Pass the belts through the center
hole of the wheel as shown above.

4. Attach the other ends of the belts
to the rear tie−down hooks.
After stowing the flat tire, check that
the tire and belts are secured.

—After changing wheels
CAUTION
D Make sure the rear seats are in
their original position.
D When carrying the flat tire, secure it using a tire tie−down
belts. Otherwise, the flat tire
may fly out in case of the sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

10. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated on page 315. If the
pressure is lower than specified, drive
slowly to the nearest Toyota dealer
and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is
missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
As soon as possible after changing
wheels, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 315 with a
torque wrench. Have a technician repair the flat tire.
After repairing the flat tire, change it
with compact spare tire and reinstall
the wheel ornament.

CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

257

If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front

—From rear

50p021a
(b) Using flat bed truck

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency towing” on page 259.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Otherwise, the underbody of the towed vehicle will be
damaged during towing.
From rear—Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
(b) Using flat bed truck

258

—Emergency towing
(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE
z Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

50p022b

50p035b

z Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to
the transaxle.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to emergency towing eyelet inside of front bumper. Use extreme
caution when towing vehicles.

259

—Installing towing eyelet
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing eyelet and towing cable or
chain. The eyelet and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.

260

Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the hybrid transaxle in “N”. The
hybrid system must be in the “IG−ON”
mode.
In the following cases, as the front wheels
might be locked by means of the parking
lock mechanism, your vehicle cannot be
towed by another vehicle using a rope.
Have your vehicle carried with the front
wheels or all the wheels raised.

50p046a

D If the parking mechanism fails.
D If the auxiliary battery is discharged.
CAUTION
If the hybrid system is not running,
the power assist for the brakes and
steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.

1. Remove the towing eyelet as shown in
the illustration.

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.

50p047a

50p048a

Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole hybrid vehicle
immobilizer system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 20.

2. Secure the towing eyelet to the hole on
the bumper by turning it clockwise.

3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely by
a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to tighten the eyelet
securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may
come off when being towed and result in death or serious injury.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

261

If you cannot operate back
door opener

50p053a

If the back door opener does not operate, you can open the back door from
the inside.
To open the back door from inside, perform the following procedure.
1. Open the luggage storage box (See
“Luggage storage box” on page 199.)
and remove the cover.

262

50p054a

2. Pull the lever with the back door motor, open the back door.
Be sure to have the back door opener
checked/repaired by your Toyota dealer.

SECTION

CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cleaning the interiorr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

263

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

D Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

D Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

D High humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

264

D Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

D High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.
To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

your

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

D If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

D Pay particular attention to the vehicle’s

underside and wheel housings as it is
difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to simply
wet the mud and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors, rocker
panels and frame members have drain
holes which should not be allowed to
clog with dirt as trapped water in these
areas can cause corrosion.

D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” for
more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if
your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can
corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Your Toyota is a hybrid vehicle. Pay
particular attention when washing your
Toyota.

D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with

NOTICE

D When having coal tar, tree sap, bird

antifreeze

droppings and carcass of an insect

Before washing your Toyota, be sure
to observe the following in order to
avoid the risk of damage to your vehicle.
z Do not splash water on the electric
components in the engine compartment. This may cause the malfunction of the electric components.

D When driving in the areas where there
is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust
and chemical substances

D When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

CAUTION
When cleaning under floor or chassis,
be careful not to injure your hands.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or in the
wheel wells.

265

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to
wash it off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.

CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged
plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off
the wheel and cause accidents while
the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.

266

NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline kerosene, benzine or strong solvents) which may be toxic or cause
damage.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.

Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure to remove it before driving
your Toyota through an automatic car
wash.

Cleaning the interior
Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

NOTICE
Always remove the plastic bumpers if
your vehicle is re−painted and placed
in a high heat paint waxing booth.
High temperatures could damage the
bumpers.

CAUTION

D Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause fire or malfunction; and it
may cause body corrosion.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,
repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

D Vehicles with side airbags:
Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious
injury.
Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.
Carpets
Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.

267

Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.

The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE

Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE
z Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts−it may weaken them.
z Do not use the belts until they become dry.

268

Windows

When cleaning the inside of the windows, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires on the rear
window.
Air conditioning control panel, audio,
instrument panel, console panel, and
switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not apply the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.

Leather interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.

z Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

269

270

SECTION

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing?? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

272
273
275
276

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

271

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical
driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and
emission control system warranties specify
that proper maintenance and care must be
performed.
See
“Owner’s
Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”
for
complete
warranty
information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

272

Scheduled maintenance

Where to go for service?

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.

Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.

For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that only genuine
Toyota parts be used for maintenance
or for the repair of the emission control system.

You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle–reliably and economically.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 8.

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself
mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are
recommended. Please be aware that
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your
warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

Coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−
through reservoir when the hybrid system
is cold. See page 288 for additional information.

CAUTION

Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 290 for additional information.

Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 304 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 290 for
additional information.

Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on level spot. See page 286 for additional
information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 208.)

273

INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in any position. Check that the
head restraint move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any
latched position.

274

Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors and trunk operate
smoothly and all latches lock securely.
Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch secures the hood from opening when
the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 291 for additional
information.

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See Section 8−2 for additional information.
When checking the tires, make sure
no nuts are missing, and check the
nuts for looseness. Tighten them if
necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page 295 for additional
information.

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

D
D
D
D

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (however,
water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

D Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

D Strange noises related to suspension
movement

D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking

D Coolant temperature continually higher
than normal

275

Emissions inspection and
maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

276

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
and the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

SECTION

8– 1

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

278
279
280
282
283

277

Engine compartment overview
1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Inverter reservoir tank
6. Fuse block
7. Radiator and condenser
8. Engine oil level dipstick
9. Auxiliary battery

81p001g

278

Fuse locations

81p003b

81p006c

81p002c

81p005b

279

Do−it−yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
7, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.

CAUTION

D When the hybrid system is on, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

D Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

D If the hybrid system is hot, do not
remove the radiator cap or loosen
the drain plugs to prevent burning
yourself.

For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 283.

D Do not leave anything that may

Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.
low open flames around fuel or the
batteries. Their fumes are flammable.

D When the hybrid system is operating with the “READY” light on, the
engine is automatically started in
some case. When you inspect the
engine compartment, be sure to
press the “POWER” switch to the
“OFF” mode.

D Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

D Be sure that the hybrid system is
in the “OFF” mode if you work near
the electric cooling fans or radiator
grille. With the ignition on, the
electric cooling fans will automatically start to run if the engine coolant temperature is high and/or the
air conditioning is on.

D Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray,
etc.

D Be extremely cautious when working on the batteries. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid
or strong alkali.

280

D Used engine oil contains potentially

D When servicing the vehicle with the

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

smart entry and start system, be
sure to keep the smart key away
from the vehicle. If the key is left
in the vehicle, the hybrid system
may start by pressing the “POWER”
switch with the brake pedal depressed.

D Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

D Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer
for information concerning recycling
or disposal.

D Take care when filling the brake
fluid reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your eyes and damage
painted surfaces. If fluid gets in
your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water immediately. If you still
feel uncomfortable with your eyes,
go to the doctor.

NOTICE
z Remember that batteries and ignition cable carry high currents or
voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).

z If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
z Do not pry the outer electrode of
spark plug against the center electrode.
z Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
z If you spill the fluid, be sure to
wash it off with water to prevent it
from damaging the parts or paint.
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the hood, check to
see that you have not forgotten any
tools, rags, etc.

281

Positioning the jack
When jacking up your vehicle with the
jack, position the jack correctly as
shown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

81p008d

Make sure to place the jack correctly,
or your vehicle may be damaged.

D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transaxle in “P”.

D Never get under the vehicle when

282

place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your body

your vehicle is supported by the
jack.

Rear

D When raising the vehicle, do not

NOTICE

D Do not start or run the engine while

81p009d

one in the vehicle.

When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
personal injury:

under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Personal injury may occur.

Front

D Do not raise the vehicle with some-

the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.

Parts and tools
Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Tools:

Parts (if level is low):

D Engine oil API grade SL “Energy−Con-

serving” or ILSAC multigrade having
viscosity proper for your climate

Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
Parts (if level is low):

D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).

Tools:

D Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Tools:

D Funnel

Parts (if level is low):

D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
brake fluid

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:

D Bulb with same number and wattage

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)

rating as original (See charts in “Replacing light bulbs–” on page 304.)

CHECKING AUXILIARY BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

D Screwdriver

Tools:

D
D
D
D

Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

terminal

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):

D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:

D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for
winter use)

283

284

SECTION

8– 2

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286
288
290
290
291
293
295
296
297
298

285

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Full level

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

CAUTION

82p001a

Add oil

O.K.

Too full

Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
With the hybrid system at operating
temperature and turned off, check the
oil level on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on a level ground. After turning off the hybrid system, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold the rag under the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

286

NOTICE
z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
z Avoid overfilling, or the hybrid system could be damaged.
z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE
10W−30 oil may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.

82P103

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W−30
API service symbol

oil008
Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice, for good
fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather.

ILSAC certification mark

287

Checking the coolant level
Oil identification marks

CAUTION

Either or both API registered marks are
added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.

The coolant heat storage tank reaches
high temperature inside. It is dangerous if hot coolant is discharged when
replacing. For replacement of the
coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil
quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designations such as SL. The center
portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−
Conserving” shown in the lower portion,
indicates that the oil has fuel−saving capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines
on the reservoir. If the level is low, add
the coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with hybrid system temperature. However,
if the level is on or below the “LOW” line,
add coolant. Bring the level up to the
“FULL” line.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.

288

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota Super
Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology
and has been specifically designed to
avoid cooling system malfunction on
Toyota vehicles.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

289

Checking the radiator and
condenser

Checking brake fluid

If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the hybrid system off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40
times.

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

82p002b

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refueling,
it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 brake fluid to
the brake reservoir.

290

If you do not follow the procedure above,
the reservoir may overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.

Checking tire inflation
pressure
NOTICE
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wipe
it off to prevent it from damaging the
parts or painting.

82p105

Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are described on pages 312 and 315. They
are also described on the tire and
loading information label as shown.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!
The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
D The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

291

D Always use a tire inflation pressure gauge. The appearance of
a tire can be misleading. Besides,
tire inflation pressures that are
even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
D Take special care when adding
air to the compact spare tire.
The smaller tire size can gain
pressure very quickly. Add compressed air in small quantities and
check the pressure often until it
reaches the specified pressure.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.

292

Tire inflation
pressure gauge

5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire inflation
pressure gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too much
air, press the center of the valve
and release the air to adjust.

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure
may waste fuel, reduce the comfort
of driving, reduce tire life and
make your vehicle less safe to
drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing tires
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation)—
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for tread
wear indicators. If the indicators
show, replace the tires. The location of tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “Δ ” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire.

293

The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you
know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the
indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

294

If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater load capacity as the originally installed
tires.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. For details about the
sidewall of the tire and the Certification Label, see pages 218 and 216.

Rotating tires
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both front or rear tires
be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
247 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.

82p104a

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual
Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above.
295

Installing snow tires and
chains
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.
CAUTION
Do not include a compact spare
tire when rotating the tires. It is
designed for temporary use only.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.

Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.

Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.

CAUTION

D Do not drive with the snow tires

Do not use snow tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control. Otherwise, an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

296

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

CAUTION
incorrectly inflated.

D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

Replacing wheels
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

CAUTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.

D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

CHAIN INSTALLATION

D Drive

Install the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the rear tires. Retighten
chains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 −
1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

D When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE
Do not attempt to use a tire chain on
the compact spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as well
as the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
This must be observed on compact spare
tire, too.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

297

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

Aluminum wheel precautions
D When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).

D If

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired, or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).

D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

D Use

only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.

D When balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.

D As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

298

SECTION

8– 3

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking auxiliary battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary battery recharging precautionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

300
302
302
304
304

299

Checking auxiliary battery
condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
AUXILIARY BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
When the auxiliary battery must be
replaced, use the Prius designated
battery.
The auxiliary battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.

D Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

D Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

D Never ingest electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.

D Keep children away from the battery.

300

—Checking auxiliary battery
exterior
EMERGENCY MEASURES

D If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.

83p035

D If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.

D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a
through to
ly take off
follow the
essary.

possibility of its soaking
your skin, so immediatethe exposed clothing and
procedure above, if nec-

D If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Open the back door. Remove the luggage storage box and auxiliary battery
cover.
If the back door does not open, see “If
you cannot operate back door opener” on
page 262.

Hold−down clamp

Ground cable

NOTICE
z Be sure the hybrid system and all
accessories are off before performing maintenance.

83p001c

z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“–” mark) first and reinstall it last.

Terminals
Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

After you reconnect the auxiliary battery,
shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm the
shift position is “N” when the “IG−ON”
mode is enabled.
After connecting the cables, the hybrid
system may not start by pushing the
“POWER” switch. In that case, push it
once again.

z Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.
If the auxiliary battery is disconnected
or run down, the power window and back
door may not operate automatically and
the jam protection function will not function correctly and does not open the back
door after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases,
you should normalize each system. To
normalize them, see “Power windows” on
page 42 and “Back door” on page 41.
Before you disconnect the auxiliary battery, confirm the shift position is “P” and
apply the parking brake completely.

301

Auxiliary battery recharging
precautions
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the
recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

Checking and replacing fuses
NOTICE

Type A

Never recharge the battery with the
hybrid system on. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

Good

Blown

Type B

CAUTION

D Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

D Only do a slow charge (3.5A or

83p003
Good

Blown

Type C

less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

Good

302

Blown

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.

83p004b

If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 279 for
locations of the fuses.
Turn the hybrid system and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 316 for the functions controlled by
each circuit.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “DOME”
or “OBDII” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its
amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again. but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

303

Adding washer fluid
If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the hybrid system and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

D To prevent burning yourself, do not
replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.

D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.
Vehicles with discharge headlights—

D Do not touch the high voltage socket when the headlight turns on.
20000 V is momentarily generated
and may cause severe injury by
electric shock.

304

D Do not disassemble, repair or take
apart the headlight bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotate components. Or you may be
injured by electric shocks. Call your
dealer when the headlights fail to
work or have to be replaced or disposed of.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lense becomes wet in the rain
or in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lense, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lense, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

—Headlights
Light bulbs

Bulb
No.

Type

Headlights
Discharge headlights

—

Halogen headlights

—

60/55

9006

Parking lights

—

Front turn signal
lights

—

Rear turn signal lights

—

Tail lights

—

7440

License plate lights

—

Interior lights

—

Personal lights

—

Door courtesy lights

—

Vanity lights

—

L u g g a g e c o m p a r tment light

—

Front fog lights

Back−up lights

83p030

1. Open the hood. Remove the clips
and take out the cover.

83p031

Removing clip

Remove and install the clips as shown in
the following illustrations.

83p032

A: D2R Discharge bulbs
B: HB2 Halogen bulbs
C: HB4 Halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs
E: Double end bulbs

Installing clip

305

83p010a

2. RIGHT−HAND HEADLIGHT ONLY: Remove the clip and take out the air
cleaner inlet.

83p011

Removing clip

Remove and install the clip as shown in
the following illustrations.

3. Unplug the connector. Turn the bulb
cover counter−clockwise and remove
it.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

83p012

Installing clip

306

83p013a

—Front fog lights
If either the left or right front fog lights
burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

83p014a

4. Release the bulb retaining spring
and remove the bulb along with the
socket. Install a new bulb into the
socket and return the bulb retaining
spring to its original position.

83p015b

Do not try to replace the front fog
light bulbs by yourself. You may damage the vehicle.

5. Install the bulb cover and turn it
clockwise. Plug in the connector.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of the
bulb with the cutout of the mounting hole.

307

—Parking lights

83p016a

83p017a

308

—Front turn signal lights

83p018a

83p019b

—Rear turn signal, tail and
back−up lights

83p023a

83p024b

—License plate lights

83p025c

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Back−up light
c: Tail light

83p026b

83p028b

Remove the cover.

83p027a

309

310

SECTION

SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enginee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312
312
312
313
313
313
315
316

311

Dimensions and weight
Overall length

mm (in.)

4445

(175.0)

Overall width

mm (in.)

1725

(67.9)

Overall height

mm (in.)

1500

Wheelbase

mm (in.)

2700

(106.3)

Front tread

mm (in.)

1505

(59.3)

Rear tread

mm (in.)

1480

(58.3)

Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)
kg (lb.)
*: Unladen vehicle

312

385

(59.1)*

(845)

Electric motor

Engine

Type:

Model: 1NZ−FXE

Permanent magnet synchronous
motor (water cooling)

Maximum output:
50/1200 − 1540 kW/rpm
Maximum torque:
400/0 − 1200

N·m/rpm

Type: 4−cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
75.0 x 84.7 (2.95 x 3.33)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
1497 (91.4)

Fuel

Hybrid vehicle battery

Service specifications

Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher

Type:

ENGINE

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., lmp.gal.):
45 (11.9, 9.9)

Nickel−Metal hydride battery

Voltage:

7.2 V

Capacity:

6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity:

Overall voltage:

201.6 V

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
Intake
0.17 − 0.23 (0.007 − 0.009)
Exhaust 0.27 − 0.33 (0.011 − 0.013)
Spark plug type:
DENSO SK16R11
NGK
IFR5A11
Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)

313

ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity
lmp.qt.):

(drain

With filter
Without filter

and

refill),

(qt.,

Recommended oil viscosity:

COOLING SYSTEM

SAE 5W−30

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):
For gasoline engine
8.6 (9.0, 7.5)
For electric motor
and inverter and
converter
2.7 (2.9, 2.4)

3.7 (3.9, 3.3)
3.4 (3.6, 3.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your
Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved “Toyota
Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the
following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

oil008
Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.

Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−
amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate
coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology. (Coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology is a
combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

314

AUXILIARY BATTERY

BRAKES

Open voltage at 20_C (68_F):
12.6 − 12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2 − 12.4 V
Half charged
11.5 − 11.9 V
Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after
the key is removed with all the lights
turned off]

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
with the traction motor running, mm (in.):
101.0 (3.98)

Charging rates:

3.5 A max.

HYBRID TRANSAXLE

Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1 − 4 (0.04 − 0.16)
Parking brake adjustment when depressed
with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):
6 − 9 clicks

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp.qt.):
3.6 (3.8, 3.2)

Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

Fluid type:
“Toyota Genuine ATF WS” or
equivalent

Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.

STEERING

Tires
Tire size and inflation pressure:
Tire size kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Standard
Front P185/65R15 86S
240 (2.4, 35)
Rear P185/65R15 86S
230 (2.3, 33)
Spare
T125/70D16 96M
420 (4.2, 60)
Wheel size:
Standard
15 x 6JJ
Spare
16 x 4T
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m,
ft·lbf):
103 (10.5, 76)
NOTE: For a complete information
on tires (e.g. replacing tires
or replacing wheels), see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum
wheel precautions”, page
291 through 298.

315

Fuses

90p007b

90p005b

90p008b

Instrument panel

Engine compartment

1. PWR 30 A: Power windows

8. GAUGE 10 A: Gauge and meter, back−
up lights, emergency flasher, power
windows

2. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger
3. M/HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror
heater
4. WIP 30 A: Windshield wiper
5. RR WIP 15 A: Rear wiper
6. WSH 20 A: Washer
7. ECU−IG 7.5 A: Smart entry and start
system, power windows, multi−information display, electric power steering,
theft deterrent system

316

Luggage compartment

9. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system
10. STOP 7.5 A: Stop lights
11. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system
12. ACC−B 25 A:
“ACC” fuses

“POWER

OUTLET”,

15. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plates
light, parking lights
16. PANEL 7.5 A: Multi−information display, clock, audio system, instrument
panel lights
17. A/C (HTR) 10 A: Air conditioning system
18. FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows
19. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlet

13. ECU−B 15 A: Multi−information display,
power windows, air conditioning system

20. ACC 7.5 A: Audio system, multi−information display, clock

14. AM1 7.5 A: Hybrid system

21. PWR OUTLET FR 15 A: Power outlet

22. IGN 7.5 A: Hybrid system, hybrid vehicle immobilizer system, SRS airbags

35. ABS−1 25 A: Anti−lock brake system

23. SPARE 30 A: Spare

36. ETCS 10 A: Electronic throttle control
system

24. SPARE 15 A: Spare

37. BATT FAN 10 A: Battery cooling fan

25. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light system

38. HAZ 10 A: Turn signal lights, emergency flasher

26. H−LP LO RH 15 A (Vehicles with discharged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicles
with halogen headlight): Right−hand
headlight (low beam)

39. DOME 15 A: Audio system, interior
lights, smart entry and start system,
gauge and meter, turn signal lights,
luggage room light, clock

27. H−LP LO LH 15 A (Vehicles with discharged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicles
with halogen headlight): Left−hand
headlight (low beam)

40. ABS MAIN3 15 A: Anti−lock brake system

28. H−LP HI RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight (high beam)

42. ABS MAIN1 10 A: Anti−lock brake system

29. H−LP HI LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight
(high beam)
30. EFI 15 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system

41. ABS MAIN2 10 A: Anti−lock brake system

43. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights
44. CHS W/P 10 A: CHS W/P
45. AMP 30 A: Audio system
46. PTC HTR2 30 A: PTC heater

31. AM2 15 A: “IGN” fuse, ignition system

47. PTC HTR1 30 A: PTC heater

32. HORN 10 A: Horn

48. CDS FAN 30 A: Electric cooling fan

33. HEV 20 A: Hybrid system

49. DC/DS−S 5 A: Inverter and converter

34. P CON MAIN 7.5 A: Parking control
system, hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

50. MAIN 120 A: Hybrid system

317

318

SECTION

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

319

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A.,
Inc.
(Toll−free:
1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

320

To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free
at 1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123
in Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from the Hotline.

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage
warnings
Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You
must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look
like, and how they are used in this manual are explained as follows:

NOTICE

Safety symbol

This is a warning against anything
which may cause damage to the
vehicle or its equipment if the
warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or
reduce the risk of damage to your
vehicle and its equipment.

CAUTION
This is a warning against anything
which may cause injury to people
if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or
must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.

When you see the
safety symbol shown
above, it means: “Do
not...”; “Do not do
this”; or “Do not let
this happen”.

321

Important information about your Toyota

322

Occupant restraint systems
Toyota encourages you and your
family to take the time to read
Section 2−2 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of helping
you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the
occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides, Section 2−2 of this
Owner’s Manual is the most important section for you and your
family to read.
Section 2−2 describes the function
and operation concerning seats,
seat belts, SRS airbags and child
restraint systems of this vehicle
and some potential hazards you
should be aware of. These systems work together along with the
overall structure of this vehicle in
order to provide occupant restraint
in the event of a crash. The effect
of each system is enhanced when
it is used properly and together
with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family
with the equal level of restraint
which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it
is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and
proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each
other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce
the possibility of death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure
that there is no injury in the event
of collision. However, the more
you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the
greater your chances become of
surviving an accident without death
or serious injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the
vehicle should wear seat belts
properly at all times. Children
should always be secured in child
restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names
imply, designed to work with, and
be supplemental to, seat belts and
are not substitutes for them. SRS
airbags can be very effective in
reducing the risk of head and
chest injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with
interior portions of the vehicle.

323

324

In order to be effective, the SRS
airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment
of the SRS airbags makes the
SRS airbags themselves potential
sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag,
or if an object or some part of his
or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag
at the time of deployment. This is
just one example of how the instructions in Section 2−2 of this
Owner’s Manual will help ensure
proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the
safety they can provide to you
and your family in the event of an
accident.
Toyota recommends you to read
the provisions in Section 2−2 carefully and refer to them as needed
during your time of ownership of
this vehicle.

Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that
monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful
for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or
a near car crash event. This is
called an Event Data Recorder
(EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly
contains the EDR. In a crash or a
near car crash event, this device
records some or all of the following information:
D Engine speed
D Whether the brake pedal was
applied or not
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator
pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission
selector lever
D Whether the driver and front
passenger wore the seat belts
or not
D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s
classification

occupant

325

326

D SRS airbag deployment data
D SRS airbag system diagnostic
data
The information above is intended
to be used for the purpose of improving
vehicle
safety
performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record
sound data such as conversation
between passengers.
Toyota will not disclose the data
recorded in an EDR to a third
party except when:

New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by
the following Toyota limited warranties:
D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty
D Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Your responsibility for
maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to
make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 7
gives details of these maintenance
requirements. Also included in
Section 7 is general maintenance.
For scheduled maintenance information,
please
refer
to
the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing
company for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
D Used as a defence for Toyota
in a law suit
D Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:
D Use the data for research on
Toyota vehicle safety performance
D Disclose the data to a third
party for research purposes
without disclosing details of
the vehicle owner, and only
when it is deemed necessary
D Disclose
summarized
data
cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Toyota organization for research
purposes

327

Important health and
safety

information about your
Toyota

CAUTION
D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well
as waste produced by component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.

328

Accessories, spare
parts and
modification of your
Toyota
A wide variety of non−genuine
spare parts and accessories for
Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should
know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair,
or replacement, or for any damage
they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota
products. Modification with non−
genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems
resulting from the modification may
not be covered under warranty.

329

Spark ignition system of
your Toyota

Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system

Tires and loading on
your Toyota

The spark ignition system in your
Toyota meets all requirements of
the Canadian Interference−Causing
Equipment Standard.

As the installation of a mobile
two−way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as multiport fuel injection system / sequential multiport
fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, SRS airbag system, seat belt
pretensioner system and Toyota
hybrid system, be sure to check
with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation.

Underinflated or overinflated
tire inflation pressure and the
excess load may result in the
deterioration of steering ability
and braking ability, leading to
an accident. Check the tire
inflation pressure periodically
and be sure to keep the load
limits given in this Owner’s
Manual. For details about tire
inflation pressure and load limits, see page 291 and pages
228.

330

Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota
contain explosive chemicals. If the
vehicle is scrapped with the airbags
and pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as
fire. Be sure to have the systems
of the SRS airbag and seat belt
pretensioner removed and disposed
of by the qualified service shop or
by your Toyota dealer before you
dispose of your vehicle.

CAUTION

Hybrid vehicle battery

When your vehicle or battery needs to be disposed
of, be sure to consult your
Toyota dealer. Hybrid vehicle batteries must be
collected through Toyota
dealers. If your vehicle is
disposed of without dismantling, someone could
receive an electric shock
by touching the high voltage parts of the hybrid vehicle battery. If the battery
is not disposed of properly, its contents can cause
death or serious injury.

The hybrid vehicle battery has a
limited service life. Call your Toyota dealer for information about recycling or disposal of hybrid vehicle battery and your vehicle.

331

CAUTION

332

Precautions for use
of hybrid vehicle
The vehicle has both high voltage
DC and AC systems as well as a
12−volt system. DC and AC high
voltage are both very dangerous
and can cause death or serious injury, severe burns and electric shock.

D In order to avoid personal injuries, do not touch the high
voltage cables (orange colored) and their connectors.

D Follow the caution labels attached
parts.

to the high voltage

D Do not remove or replace the
high voltage parts such as
the inverter unit (located in
the engine compartment), hybrid vehicle battery (located
behind rear seat), etc.

D Do not touch the service plug
located in the left side trim
of the luggage compartment
without hybrid system technical training. (See “Precautions for use” on page 14 in
Section 1−2.) This component
is provided to disable the
high voltage system in case
of servicing at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

If an accident occurs
D Pull your vehicle off the road,
push the “P” position switch,
stop the hybrid system and if
the key is inserted into key
slot, remove it.

D In order to avoid personal injuries, do not touch any high
voltage wirings and their connectors, and high voltage
parts (inverter unit, hybrid vehicle battery, etc.).

D If

some exposed electric
wires are protruding inside or
outside of your vehicle, an
electric shock may occur.
Never
touch
the
electric
wires.

D If fluid leaks or gets in some
parts of the vehicle, never
touch it because it may be
electrolyte (strong alkali) from
the hybrid vehicle battery. If
it gets into your skin or eyes,
wash off immediately with a
large amount of water, if possible, boric acid solution, and
get immediate medical attention in order to help avoid
serious injury.

D If a vehicle fire occurs, extin-333
guish it using a fire extinguisher for the exclusive use
on electric fires. Or, use a
large amount of water to prevent flammable gas from being generated from the batteries.

D If your vehicle needs to be
towed, do it with the front
wheels raised. For details on
towing, see “If your vehicle
needs to be towed” on page
258 in Section 5.

334

CAUTION
High Voltage
Your vehicle is equipped with
cables connected to parts of
the vehicle subject to high voltage (about 500 V at maximum).
There are some other parts that
reach high temperatures while
you drive. Never touch battery
cables (wrapped in orange−colored harnesses) or their connectors since they are under
high voltage and dangerous.
Caution labels are applied to
these parts to identify them.
Carefully observe the instructions on these caution labels.

00p001

335

Quick index
D If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . 117

U −7

D If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
D If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
D If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
D If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
D Tips for driving during break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
D How to start the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
D General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)
or higher.
See page 204 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)
See page 206 for detailed information.
Engine oil:
API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
is recommended.
See page 287 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 291 through 298.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 315.

Publication No. OM47509U
Part No. 01999-47509
Printed in Japan 01−0409−00 C

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 84.158975, 2016/02/13-02:40:29
Modify Date                     : 2017:01:04 14:16:12-08:00
Create Date                     : 2017:01:04 14:16:12-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:01:04 14:16:12-08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:09312390-3b4e-47eb-9cc1-227de7435a42
Instance ID                     : uuid:5b7208a6-b505-4c31-a108-fa66e4c62e7d
Page Count                      : 336

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

OM47509U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation